APTARE StorageConsoleReport User’s Guide
7.0
Copyrights and TrademarksCopyright © 2007-2009 APTARE, Inc., All rights reserved.
The information contained in this book is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
APTARE® and StorageConsole® are registered trademarks of APTARE, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.Hitachi is a trademark of Hitachi Data Systems.Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Microsoft, Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.Macintosh, Mac, Apple, Safari, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.EMC Legato NetWorker is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation.NetBackup and Backup Exec are registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation.NetApp, Data ONTAP, SnapVault, SnapMirror, and FlexVol are registered trademarks of NetApp, Inc.VMware is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc.Other company and product names mentioned herein can be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and should be treated as such.
Publication Change RecordThe following table records all revisions to this publication. This first entry is always the publication’s initial release. Each entry indicates the date of the release and the number of the system release to which the revision corresponds.
Doc Revision ID Date System ReleaseMK-97APT025-01 February 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5
March 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.19April 2008May 2008June 2008July 2008
APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.22, v6.5.23, v6.5.24 and v6.5.25
September 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6December 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6 Service Pack 1April 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.0
Copyrights and Trademarks 3
4 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Contents
Preface iAbout This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iWho Should Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iRelated Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iTypographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiContacting APTARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Chapter 1Getting Acquainted With Reports 1About the Portal User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Navigation Pane (Report Navigator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Content Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Tables and Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Logging In/Off the Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Managing My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Changing Your Login Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 2Generating and Maintaining Reports 9About the Report Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Menu Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Report Template and Report Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Units of Measure in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
About Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Selecting Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Listing Server Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Searching for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Searching for Servers in Report Designers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Report Designer Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Backup Manager Primary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Backup Manager Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Capacity Manager Primary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Capacity Manager Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Filter Report Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Filter Report Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Sorting Columns in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Setting Refresh Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Modifying Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Saving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Deleting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Searching for a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 3Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting 33Exporting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Scheduling Exported Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Emailing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Scheduling Emailed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Scheduled Reports Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Contents 5
6 APTARE S
Deleting Scheduled Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Sharing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Technical Community Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Adding Notes to Backup Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Chapter 4Organizing Reports 49Task Overview: Organizing Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Creating Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Adding Reports to Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Dashboard Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Deleting Reports from Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Creating a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Changing Your Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 5Custom Reports 55About Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Using Report Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Creating a Custom Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configure Report Designer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Specify the SQL Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Sample Queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Using Functions in Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Format the Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Edit a Custom Report Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Exporting/Importing Report Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Export a Report Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Import a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 6System Administration Reports 89Collector Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Collection Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Data Collection Message Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Database Error Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Report Activity Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Report Activity Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Monitoring Data Collection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Top Running Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Top Running Report Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Version History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 7Backup Manager Management Reports 99Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Job Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Job Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Job Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Adding a Note to a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Job Volume Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Job Duration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Error Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Consecutive Errors By Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
torageConsole Report User’s Guide
Largest Backup Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Monthly Backup Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Job Summary By Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Running and Queued Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119HPD Session Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter 8Backup Administration Reports 121Operations Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Command Center Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Data Protection Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Message of the Day Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Server Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Server Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Mission Control Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Tailoring the Report Output by Backup Product . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Client Protection Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135TSM Storage Pools Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138TSM Process Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Client Job Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Job Throughput Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Job Activity Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Chapter 9Media Management Reports 143Using Media Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Current Media Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Tape Media Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Tape Media Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Tape Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Chapter 10Backup SLA Reports 149Available SLA Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Backup Start Time SLA Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance . . . . . . . 152Backup Status SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Changing the Success Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance . . . . . . . . 154Backup Duration SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance . . . . . . . . 156
Chapter 11Backup Storage Utilization Reports 157Using Storage Utilization Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Disk Usage and Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Storage Unit Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Storage Unit Event Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Drive Utilization and Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Drive Performance Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NetBackup Drive Performance Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Drive Performance Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170TSM Database Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Storage Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Real Time Library and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Contents 7
8 APTARE S
Chapter 12Backup Manager Forecasting Reports 175Forecasting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Media Forecasting Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Media Availability Forecast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Media Consumption Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Media Usage Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Scratch Pool Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chapter 13Backup Billing and Usage Reports 185Available Billing and Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Determining Media Chargebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Determining Backup Chargebacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Billing and Chargeback Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Server Consumption Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Chapter 14Backup Policies Reports 193NetBackup Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Backup Policy Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194TSM Policy Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Policy Domain Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197NetWorker Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Group Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Client Instance Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Backup Specification Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Backup Specification Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 15Restoring Files and Folders 205Restoring Backup Files and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Monitoring Progress of Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Chapter 16Capacity Manager Reports 207Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process . . . . . . . . . 208Overview of Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Why Capacity Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Capacity Manager Quick-Start List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Array Capacity and Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214List Array Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Host Capacity & Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Host Utilization Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Array Group Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group Specifics . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Array Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Array Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Host Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Applications At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Over-Provisioned Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . 239
torageConsole Report User’s Guide
Available/Reclaimable Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Array Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Allocated but Unused LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Unallocated LUNs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Suspected De-provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Unused Disks/Volume Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Capacity Chargeback and Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Utilization By Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Utilization By Storage Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Utilization By Server Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
LUNs At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Over-Provisioned LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Hosts at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Over-Provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Chapter 17NetApp Capacity Reports 259Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260NetApp Storage System Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264NetApp LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266NetApp Aggregate Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268NetApp Aggregate Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269NetApp Plex Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270NetApp Volume Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272NetApp Volume Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274NetApp NFS Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277NetApp CIFS Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278QTree Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279NetApp Snapshot Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Array iSCSI Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281NetApp Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282NetApp Aggregates at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283NetApp Volumes at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Thin Provisioning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Chapter 18IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports 287Overview of IBM Array Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View) . . . . . . . . . 289IBM Array Site Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290IBM Array Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292IBM Array Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294IBM Rank Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299IBM Extent Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301IBM Disk Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Chapter 19HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports 305Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Hitachi Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Chapter 20Virtualization Manager Reports 309Virtualization Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Contents 9
10 APTARE
Overview of Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Understanding the Datastore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and Monitoring . . . . . . . 313
VM Server Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314VM Server Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316VM Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321VM Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323VM Files Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Datastore Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Datastore Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Datastore Usage Breakdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Physical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Physical Disk Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Logical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341VM Size Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Datastore Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Chapter 21Replication Manager Reports 345Overview of Replication Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346SnapMirror Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347SnapMirror Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349SnapMirror Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351SnapMirror Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352SnapMirror Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354SnapMirror Relationship Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Data Protection Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357FlexClone Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Aggregate Mirror Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359SnapVault Secondary Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360SnapVault Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361SnapVault Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362SnapVault Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364SnapVault Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365SnapVault Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Index 367
StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Chapter 0PrefaceThank you for purchasing APTARE® StorageConsole.
About This BookThis book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book assumes that you read the APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users.
Who Should Use This BookAPTARE recognizes that the Portal is useful to a number of different users:• Storage Administrators• Storage Managers/Directors• Legal Compliance Professionals• Capacity Planners• Billing and Chargeback Professionals
Related DocumentationAPTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5The following documents contain additional information relevant to installing, maintaining, and administering this system.• APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes - This document outlines what’s new in the release
and what known issues were fixed in the release. and is available online at www.aptare.com• APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide - This document provides a list
of the supported products and hardware requirements. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users - This book provides a basic introduction to the Portal and describes the basic workflow to begin using the reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Administrators - This book describes the basic workflow involved in setting up the backup reporting environment. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Symantec Backup Exec - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data
About This Book i
Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for HP Data Protector - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for EMC Legato NetWorker - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Agent Installation Guide for NetBackup - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Capacity Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Upgrade Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to upgrade to a major release of the software. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• Hitachi Storage Viewer Portal Installation Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install the Portal Server and the Reporting Database. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide - This book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide - This book provides information about how to manage the Portal to support report generation and report access. These tasks are usually performed through the Portal user interface. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide - This book provides information to help you maintain and monitor the entire platform to ensure its availability. This book covers mostly back-end administration—administration tasks usually performed on the Portal Server and Database Server. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Database Programmer’s Guide - This book provides information about how to query the Reporting Database using the provided database views. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
ii Administrator’s Guide
Typographical ConventionsThis document uses different typefaces to indicate different kinds of information. The following table explains these typographical conventions.
Font MeaningTypewriter Indicates error messages, file name, or screen output.Bold In a command line, indicates information to be entered
exactly as shown.Italics Indicates a variable for which you should substitute an
appropriate value.
Typographical Conventions iii
Contacting APTARE
Technical Support: Customer Care Group• [email protected] or • 1-408-871-9848• 1-866-9-APTARE, Option #1, 6:30am - 5:30pm
Pacific Time
Sales: • [email protected] or• 1 866-9-APTARE, Option
#2
iv Administrator’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 1Chapter 0Getting Acquainted With Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• About the Portal User Interface• Available Reports• Logging In/Off the Portal• Managing My Profile• Changing Your Login Password
About the Portal User InterfaceThe reporting database is accessed via a centralized web portal interface, which follows web-based standards to offer common navigation features. Using your favorite browser, you can securely view backup reporting and management details. Interactive dashboards offer drill-down access to file-level specifics.
Navigation Pane (Report Navigator)The Navigation pane, at the left of the Portal window, provides access to dashboards and reports. Categories in this list can be expanded to reveal additional reports and then collapsed to reduce screen clutter. Click on the arrow point to the left of the entries to expand/collapse the list..
The Report Finder search box offers an additional method for selecting a specific report or for displaying a list of similar reports. The Finder supports a word or partial word search. For example, to view a list of all of your log reports, type log in the
About the Portal User Interface 1
Report Finder search box. Likewise, to list reports related to SLAs, type SLA in the Report Finder box Tip: To refresh the Navigation pane, go to the Report Finder box and click Clear.
Content PaneThe Content pane is the main display area to the right of the Navigation pane. The Content pane shows the details of elements that you select in the Navigation pane.When you select multiple reports or views from the Navigation pane, the Content pane launches tabbed displays to enable easy, concurrent access to several reports. Use typical browser actions to remove a tabbed display or to switch between tabbed views.
2 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Toolbar OptionsAlong the top border of the Portal window, a toolbar categorizes your options.
:The items that you see depend on your permissions—User or Administrator privileges, as shown in Table 1.1. For details about these features, see:• APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide• APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Tool Item User Admin Documented in:
Report
Close All Tabs x x self-explanatoryNew Dashboard x x Report User’s GuideImport Template x x Report User’s GuideTemplate Designer x x Report User’s GuideMy Scheduled Reports x x Report User’s GuideMy Shared Reports x x Report User’s GuideGo To My Homepage x x Report User’s GuideSet This Report As My Homepage x x Report User’s Guide
Tools
Search x x Report User’s GuideCreate Restore Job x x Report User’s GuideManage Restore Jobs x Application Administrator’s
GuideData Collection Status x Application Administrator’s
GuideMy Profile x x Report User’s GuideChange My Password x x Report User’s Guide
Admin
Server Groups x Application Administrator’s Guide
Attributes x Application Administrator’s Guide
Users and Privileges x Application Administrator’s Guide
User Groups x Application Administrator’s Guide
Domains x Application Administrator’s Guide
Discovery Policies x Application Administrator’s Guide
Date Collector Policies x Application Administrator’s Guide
Billing and Usage Policies x x Report User’s Guide
Help Help Topics x x self-explanatoryAbout APTARE StorageConsole x x self-explanatory
Logout End your session. x x Report User’s Guide
Table 1.1 Portal Toolbar Options
About the Portal User Interface 3
Available ReportsThe Portal includes a number of pre-defined reports, which you can tailor and save as report instances to meet your specific reporting requirements. The best way to become acquainted with available reports is to expand the list in the Navigation pane, to the left of the Portal’s browser window. Reports are designed to enable views of high-level information, with drilldown access to details in sub-reports. This hierarchy is simply organized as:• Tier 1 - High-level reports present data in the form of tables and charts.• Tier 2 - Summary level data is presented in tabular form. The rows in the table are the details
that were aggregated in the high-level chart.• Tier 3 - Detail reports display specifics related to the drilldown selection in a Tier 2 report.
Tables and Charts• Tables display data in rows and columns, with highlighted links that enable drilldown access
to additional details. When you click a link, a new report is generated in a new pane with a tab displayed at the top of the Content pane. Tabular data can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the column headers. Some tables use color to highlight potential problems. For example, the Host Utilization Detail report highlights values when they fall below the availability threshold.
• Charts utilize colored bar graphs and pie charts to enable at-a-glance analysis. Multi-colored bars can be deciphered with a few simple moves of your mouse. Glide your cursor over each colored section of a bar or pie to view a text description of what that portion of the bar/pie represents. For example, in the Job Status Summary report, a single bar will reflect the number of event failures, the number of warnings, and the number of successful backups. In addition, some charts display a trend line graph with data points represented as percentages. If you move your cursor over a particular data point arrow, the performance percentage value will be displayed.
4 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Logging In/Off the PortalThe Portal allows more than one Administrator and User to be logged on simultaneously.The Portal works with the following browsers:
To log in to the Portal:
1. Do one of the following from your browser:• If your company hosts the Portal, go to http://aptareportal.mydomain.com.• If a third-party hosts your Portal, go to http://my.storageconsole.com.The Portal login window appears.
2. Type your email address and password, then click the Login button.
If this is your first time logging in to the Portal, your Administrator provided you a default password.
To log off the Portal:
Click on Logout in the upper right-hand corner of the Portal toolbar. The login page and a message appears, confirming that you’ve successfully logged off the Portal.
Browser Mac Windows Unix LinuxMicrosoft Internet Explorer 7.0+ xMozilla Firefox 2.0+, 3.0+ x x x xApple Safari 3.2+ x x
Table 1.2 Supported Browsers
Logging In/Off the Portal 5
Managing My ProfileWhile the Application Administrator has the responsibility of setting up login access, you can update certain other fields in your profile.
To update your profile:1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > My Profile.2. Modify any of the following fields:
• First name• Last name• Email• Work phone• Cell phone
Note: Your login ID can be updated only by the Application Administrator. To change your password, see Changing Your Login Password.
6 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Changing Your Login PasswordIf you forget your password, contact your Application Administrator. Your administrator has the permissions to change any user’s password. Also, follow this procedure to simply change your password.The password must be a minimum of 7 characters and contain at least 1 non-alpha character. It is recommended that you create a strong password.
To assign or change a user password:
1. In the Portal’s toolbar, choose Tools > Change Password.
2. In the User Password pane, type the new user password, confirm the password, then click Save to update the password.
Changing Your Login Password 7
8 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]][=‘qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 2Chapter 1Generating and Maintaining Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• About the Report Designer• About Report Scope• Selecting Report Scope• Listing Server Groups• Searching for Servers• Report Designer Parameters• Generating Reports• Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports• Sorting Columns in Reports• Setting Refresh Intervals• Modifying Reports• Saving Reports• Deleting Reports• Searching for a Report
9
About the Report DesignerThe Report Designer tool enables you to specify parameters and then generate a report. To launch the Report Designer, find a report in the navigation pane at the left of the Portal window and then expand a menu group and click on any report template, as shown in the following figure.The Portal organizes reports into functional groups: Backup Manager, Capacity Manager, Virtualization Manager, and Replication Manager. These groups are represented by colored bars in the navigation pane. Click on the colored bar to expand the tree to view the available menu groups, report templates, and report instances.
To understand Report Designer, you need only understand a few basic report components, described in the following sections:• Menu Group• Report Template and Report Instance
Report Designer displays a pop-up window in which you can specify report criteria, as shown in the following example. See About Report Scope for details.
10 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Manager Scope SelectionFor Backup Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope:In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.
About the Report Designer 11
Capacity Manager Scope SelectionFor Capacity Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope:In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.
12 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Virtualization Manager Scope SelectionThe Virtualization Manager reports enable a variety of mutually exclusive scope selections:• Datastores - Select specific VM storage locations for a report.• Hypervisors - Expand the list to select entities within the virtualized platform, such as Data
Centers and VMs.• Server Groups
About the Report Designer 13
Menu GroupA menu group is a folder that contains all of your report templates. There are several default menu groups, including Management Reports and SLA Reports. You cannot delete these default menu groups.
Report Template and Report Instance A report template provides a structure for generating a report based on parameters that you specify. The Portal provides many default report templates, such as Job Status Report and Job Duration report. You cannot change, rename, or delete any default report templates. However, you can create new report templates and you can generate reports from existing report templates. The reports that you generate from a report template are called report instances. You can create as many report instances as you want. A report instance is a “point in time” view of the current state of your data. Each time you launch a report instance, the most current information populates your browser window. You can save a report instance, which saves the scope and parameters that you specified—not the report output.
Units of Measure in ReportsFor certain reports, an Advanced option in the Report Designer enables the selection of the unit of measure—MBytes, GBytes, or TBytes.If you notice a discrepancy in the values reported by the Portal reports versus the values you see in the backup product itself, this is likely due to the conversion of the units of measure. Note that the Portal uses 1024 for the value of a KB.So, at first glance when comparing reports, the following may appear to be inaccurate:84,977,912.22 MB —> converted to GB —> 82,986.24 GB84,977,912.22/1024 = 89,986.24
14 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
About Report Scope When you generate a report, Report Designer prompts you to define the servers or a list of clients that you want included in the report scope. Report scope simply refers to the criteria that you specify to filter the data that’s included in a report.You can scope by the following filters:• Server Groups. Refers to the server group(s) and server sub-group(s) that you can choose,
which depends on the home group to which you belong.• Attributes. Refers to the attributes associated with a server group; for example, operating
system. For more information, go to the APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide.
• Clients. Select specific clients for a static report. A static report does not take into account changes in your network topology, so if you add clients to a network, you either have to explicitly include them in your report scope or add them to a server group. To ensure that clients are always included in reports, assign them to a server group.
When you generate a report, the Report Designer initiates a database query, based on the report scope that you specify. Since the nature of your IT environment is dynamic—that is, it’s not uncommon to add server groups and clients to your network—reports reflect the updates.Use the following guidelines to ensure that your reports include the data you expect to see:• If you add new server groups after you generate a report, the next time you generate this
same report, it will include different results. When you scope by server group or attributes, the Report Designer produces a dynamic report.
• If you add clients to your network, but do not assign them to a server group, then generate a report without including the new clients in your scope, you can be certain that the data for that client will not be in the report. This type of report scope produces a static report. However, if you add the client to a server group and this server group is part of the report scope, the report automatically includes report data for that client.
About Report Scope 15
Selecting Report ScopeYou can create static reports or dynamic reports. To create static reports, define your report scope based on a list of individual clients. To produce dynamic reports, define your report scope based on domain, server groups, and attributes.To learn about how report scope selects clients. Go to About Report Scope. For advanced report filtering, see Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports.
To select report scope:
1. In the Navigation pane, select a report to generate. For example: Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary
The Report Designer window pops up.2. From the Report Designer, go to the Scope pane and click Modify. The Client Selection
window launches.
3. Do one of the following:• Create a dynamic report. In the Server Groups tab, select the group of clients that you
want to include in your report:• Search for specific servers. See Searching for Servers in Report Designers.• If you want to begin by including all clients, select the entire domain—the top level
server group. Proceed to Step 4.• If you want to begin by including specific clients within a server group, select the
check box for that server group. Proceed to Step 4.
16 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
• Create a static report. Select a list of individual clients that you want to include in your report:
• In the Server Groups tab, drill down to each client’s server group and select the client’s check box; or
• Go to the Clients tab and create a list of clients based on attributes.4. To narrow your scope and filter the results based on attributes, select the attributes from the
Attributes tab.
5. Click OK. You’ve specified the report scope. NextStep
If necessary, continue specifying other report parameters, then click Generate to view the report that you designed.
Listing Server GroupsTypically, you generate reports for a specific server group or set of server groups. In addition, you may want to drilldown to a particular client within a server group. So, when you are defining the scope of a report, you need to understand the organization of the server groups in your domain. To search for a specific server, refer to Searching for Servers.To view the server groups in your Portal domain, use the following procedure.
1. In the Menu list at the left of the Portal window, expand Server Groups.
2. You can drill down to details for the following information:• Client - displays the Server Details report• Server - displays the Server Details report• Last Backup - displays the Job Details• Backups This Month - displays the Job Summary report
Note: The Backups this month value does not include failed jobs.
Listing Server Groups 17
Searching for ServersWhen you are selecting a scope in a Report Designer window, you may need to find and verify details about a particular server. To generate a list of servers, from the Portal toolbar, select:Tools > Search
Searching Considerations• Wildcard searches are supported, such as: a*. The asterisk is required for wildcard searches.• Search results may include servers that appear to be unrelated to the search, as host aliases
also are included in the resulting server list. Click on the server to view the Server Details Report, which lists Host Aliases.
18 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Searching for Servers in Report DesignersFor reports that can be filtered by servers and server groups, the report designer offers a search capability, as shown in the following example.
Searching for Servers 19
Report Designer ParametersEach time you generate a report, the Report Designer presents you with report parameters that you select to tailor the output. For parameter details, see:• Backup Manager Primary Settings• Backup Manager Advanced Settings• Capacity Manager Primary Settings• Capacity Manager Advanced SettingsNote: Not all reports use all parameters. For example, the Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report does not need to take into account specific backup events or status, so those options will not be displayed in the Report Designer window.
Backup Manager Primary Settings The availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
• Time Period• Start Date / End Date• Scope• Group By• Media Location• Media Status
• Event Type• Event Status• # of Consecutive Errors• Dynamic Report Start & End Times• Cascade into sub-groups
Time Period
The reporting time periods for this report. Your choices range from the last 12 hours to the last 7 years. The options for this parameter depend on the report.
Start Date / End Date
If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic report—that is, a report that changes as the underlying data changes—do not specify a start and end date, as the default always represents the current day.
Table 2.1 Backup Manager Primary Settings
20 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Scope
Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.• By Server Group. Includes data from default and user-defined server
groups. For information about server groups, see the Application Administrator’s Guide.
• By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined attributes or characteristics. For information about attributes, go to the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide.
• By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather than data for server groups.
To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.
Event Type
The type of jobs you are interested in:• All Backup & Restore Events• All Backup Events• Full Backups• Incremental Backups• Restores
Group By
Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either server, client, or policy.
Media Location
Use the drop-down list to select the type of media that you want to include in the report. The Default setting for this parameter is All Media.
Media Status
The Media Status parameter is included in the Tape Media Summary Report Designer. You can specify which media should be included in the report by selecting one of the following options: All Media, Expired Media, Available Media, In Use Media or Full Media.The default setting for this parameter is All Media.
Event Status
Applies to all backup event-driven reports. Select from the following event status options: • All Events• Successful Events• Warning Events• Failed Events
# of Consecutive Errors
Use this filter to exclude consecutive errors. This option comes in handy when troubleshooting by limiting the report to servers with excessive activity. Select a number from the drop-down list. Only sets of consecutive errors >= the specified number will be included in the report.
Table 2.1 Backup Manager Primary Settings
Report Designer Parameters 21
Backup Manager Advanced SettingsThe availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
Dynamic Report Start & End Times
Provides the user with the ability to specify dynamic report start and end day and time. Simply specify the number of days before or after the current day as well as the time for both the start and end day and times to be used to generate the report.
Cascade into sub-groups
The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-groups when generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.
• Start Time / Finish Time• Time Zone• Parent Job Only• Backup Window
• Error Code Excludes• Ignore Retries• Job Types
Start Time / Finish Time
Enables you to instruct the application to use the event start or finish time as the include trigger when culling the events for inclusion within the time frame specified for the report.For example, if you only want to display events that occurred between 12AM and 6:30AM, then specify those times for the start and finish time parameters so that the application filters the events by those time constraints.Available in various backup/restore events reports.
Time ZoneEnables you to select a specific time zone to normalize the report by any time zone equivalent in the world. The default setting for this parameter is the time zone setting of the Management Server.
Parent Job Only
This option is available only in the Job Status Summary and Job Summary reports. For NetBackup, the Portal groups the jobs with the same parent-child relationship that NetBackup uses. Some customers prefer to see only the status of the parent jobs, so this option enables that selection.
Backup Window
Select a custom backup window to be applied to the report. Typically, backups begin at the end of the business day, but they do not finish before the end of the day—thereby skewing the success statistics for the day. To more accurately reflect backup SLA metrics, you can re-define a day with a custom backup window. These custom backup windows are defined by the StorageConsole System Administrator.
Table 2.2 Backup Manager Advanced Settings
Table 2.1 Backup Manager Primary Settings
22 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Error Code Excludes
Check the Set Error Excludes box and the application will dynamically generate an Error Code ID/Descriptions Dialogue where you can check all the error codes that need to be excluded from the report. Then, click Accept and all the codes will auto-populate the Exclude Id text box. Any event which exited with an error code specified in the exclude list will not be included in the resulting report.Note: This functionality currently is available only for the Consecutive Errors By Client Report.
Ignore Retries
Check this box to indicate that retries for backup jobs should not be incorporated in the statistics shown.
Job TypesRefers to the type of backup job. Each backup product has its own set of job types.
Table 2.2 Backup Manager Advanced Settings
Report Designer Parameters 23
Capacity Manager Primary SettingsThe availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
• Storage Arrays• Scope• Start Date / End Date
• Threshold• Group By• Cascade into sub-groups
Storage Arrays Lists all the storage arrays that the Data Collectors identified.
Scope
Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.• By Server Group. Includes data from default and
user-defined server groups. For information about server groups, see the Application Administrator’s Guide.
• By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined attributes or characteristics. For information about attributes, go to the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide.
• By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather than data for server groups.
To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.
Start Date / End Date
If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic report—that is, a report that changes as the underlying data changes—do not specify a start and end date, as the default always represents the current day.
Threshold
For Capacity At Risk reports only, limit the report output to a threshold category:• Low • Warning• Critical
Table 2.3 Capacity Manager Primary Settings
24 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Capacity Manager Advanced SettingsThe availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
Group By
Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either server, client, or policy.
Cascade into sub-groups
The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-groups when generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.
CapacityEnables you to specify the output in Terabytes, Gigabytes, or Megabytes. For consistency, consider using the same capacity for all reports.
Table 2.4 Capacity Manager Advanced Settings
Table 2.3 Capacity Manager Primary Settings
Report Designer Parameters 25
Generating ReportsThe default reports meet most users’ needs. However, if the default reports do not include the fields that you need, create a custom report. See “Using Report Template Designer” on page 56..
To generate a report based on a default report:
BeforeYou
Begin
Identify the report that represents the reporting data that you want. View the list of reports in the report group folders in the Navigation pane.
1. From the Navigation pane, select the report that you want to generate. The Report Designer launches.
The Report Designer window is unique to the report you are generating, displaying only the parameters that are relevant to the specific report.
2. Specify the report parameters, then click Generate. Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane and displays the Toolbar from which you can perform other tasks.
If there is no data on which to report, a report will not be generated. Note: When the Portal determines that a large amount of data has been returned for display, the resulting report window provides paging links: Previous and Next.
NextStep
After generating a report you can do a few things:• Save the report. Go to Saving Reports.• Schedule an automated report based on the report you generated.Go to “Scheduling Emailed
Reports” on page 39.• Instantly email the report to yourself or others. Go to “Emailing Reports” on page 38.• Export the saved report in one of the following common formats: HTML or CSV.• Share a report to a message group.
26 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Advanced Filtering for Tabular ReportsIn addition to the filtering that is achieved in the Report Designer window, table-formatted reports can be further filtered on Rows and/or Columns, using the following procedures.Note: To optimize performance, be sure to use the filtering that’s available in the Report Designer before using any advanced filtering.
Filter Report RowsWhen you filter rows, you define the criteria for the data rows you want to see in the report. Drop-down lists enable selection from the available columns. Then, you supply the operator—such as equals or does not contain—and a value for that column. Up to 4 criteria selections can be joined to form the filter.Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied.1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report.
2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter.
3. In the first drop-down list, select a column name.
4. In the second drop-down list, select an operator.
Operator Descriptionequals1 Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to
the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or String.
not equal1 Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or String.
greater than Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date.
less than Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller than the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date.
greater than or equal to Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date.
less than or equal to Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date.
contains1 Filters rows where the value entered is present anywhere in the value of the associated column. Example: If the column value is “rattle” and the value entered is “rat” or “at” the row will be displayed. The column can only be of the type String.
does not contain1 Filters rows where the value entered is not present anywhere in the value of the associated column. The column only can be of the type String.
Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports 27
5. When filtering on Indicator Lights, as shown in the following example, filter on the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.
6. To combine several expressions into one filter, select an and or or operator from the drop-down list at the end of the row.
7. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied.
The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter. When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.
Includes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to any of the comma-separated values entered. Example: If you enter a value “chair, table, desk” and the column value is “table” the row will be displayed. The column can be of the type Number or String.
Excludes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal to any of the comma-separated values entered. The column can be of the type Number or String.
matches regular expression Filters rows where the value of associated column matches the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type String.
does not match regular expression
Filters rows where the value of associated column does not match the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type String.
28 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Filter Report ColumnsWhen you filter columns, you check the columns that you want to appear in the report and uncheck the columns that you want displayed.Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied.1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report.
2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter.
3. In the Report Filtering window, click the Columns tab to view the list of columns.
All of the columns initially will be checked.4. Uncheck the columns that you want to remove from the report.
5. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied.
The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter. When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.
Sorting Columns in ReportsFor reports that display data in tables, you can easily change the order that data is displayed in columns.
To sort columns in a table report:
• From the report, click on any of the table headings to sort the data for that heading in ascending order.
• From the report, click the heading a second time to sort by descending order.• To return to the report’s original order, click the Customize button and Re-Generate the
report.
Setting Refresh IntervalsOnce you have generated and saved a report, you may want to periodically refresh the data that is displayed. The following characteristics apply to refresh intervals:• A report or dashboard first must be saved before a refresh interval can be configured.• Available refresh intervals include: 3, 5, 10, or 15 minutes.• A report that is refreshing will have its last refresh time displayed in the tab of the window.• Refresh intervals are not persistent—that is, once a report is closed, its refresh setting is
cleared.• To cancel a report that is refreshing, simply close the tab.
Sorting Columns in Reports 29
To set a report or dashboard to refresh its display every few minutes, use the following procedure.
1. Generate the report and save it.
A report must be saved in order to have the refresh capability associated with it.
2. Right-click within the content of the report window to display a context menu.
3. Select Set Refresh Interval from the context menu.
4. Set the refresh rate to 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes and click OK.
Modifying ReportsYou can modify the parameters of a report instance. After you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the browser window, along withe a report toolbar from which you can choose to customize (modify) the report instance.
To modify a report instance:
1. Click on the report instance that you want to modify. The Report Designer renders the report and displays a Toolbar in the Content pane.
2. From the Toolbar, click Customize.
3. Change the report parameters, then click Re-Generate.
See Saving Reports for details on saving report instances.
30 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Saving ReportsRecall that you only can save a report instance—that is, a report that you generated, based on one of a default Report Templates. When you save a report instance, you are saving the definition and parameters, not the report output. Because the Report Designer saves the reporting parameters only, not the actual report data, you do not need to worry about running out of disk space. Each time you launch a report instance, the report’s data refreshes.Note: To capture report output into a saved file, use the export feature, Exporting Reports.
When you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane and then displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to save the report instance. When you save a report, the report instances’ parameters are saved in the Reporting Database. Once you create a report instance, it remains in the Reporting Database until you delete it.
To save a report instance:
BeforeYou
Begin
Generate the report if you have not already done so. See “Generating Reports” on page 26..
1. From the report, in the Content pane, click Save.
2. In the Save Report dialog box, specify a descriptive report name, then click Save.
The Report Designer saves the report instance under the report template (folder) in which you created the report.
To rename or copy a report instance:
1. Generate the saved report instance.
2. Click Replace to overwrite the current instance or Copy to create a copy of the instance. The copy can have a duplicate name or you can modify the name (recommended) before copying the instance.
NextStep
If you intend to access this report instance often, consider adding it to your My Reports or to your dashboard. Go to “Creating Dashboards” on page 50 or “Adding Reports to Dashboards” on page 51.
Saving Reports 31
Deleting ReportsYou cannot delete default reports, but you can delete report instances that you created based on a default report. When you delete a report instance, you permanently delete it from the Reporting Database.
To delete a report instance:
1. From the Navigation pane, right-click on the report instance that you want to delete.
2. From the shortcut menu, click Delete Saved Report and then confirm your selection.
Searching for a ReportUse the Report Finder to locate a report. Report Finder searches both saved report instances and default report templates.
To search for a report:
1. From the Navigation pane, locate the Report Finder search bar.
2. In the search box, type in one or more keywords represented in the report name, then click Find. A list of reports matching your keywords appears in the Navigation pane.
3. To return the Navigation pane to its original list, click Clear.
Report Finder supports a partial-name search. For example, if you’re looking for all reports related to service-level agreements, you can type SLA to list all relevant reports. Note that if you establish a standard report-naming convention, this type of search will be more fruitful.
32 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 3Chapter 2Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting
This chapter covers the following topics:• Exporting Reports• Scheduling Exported Reports• Emailing Reports• Scheduling Emailed Reports• Scheduled Reports Administration• Deleting Scheduled Reports• Alerting• Sharing Reports• Technical Community Sharing• Adding Notes to Backup Job Details
33
Exporting Reports If you need to make the report data available to an external application or just save it as a hardcopy report, you can export a report to a file. The date for the report will be the date and time that the report was generated. The date and time are derived from the Portal Server’s time zone, which was determined when your administrator installed the Portal.Note: The exporting procedures described in this section should not be confused with exporting a Custom Report definition (created in the Report Template Designer). This information can be found in Exporting/Importing Report Templates.
To export report data or schedule an export report run:
BeforeYou
Begin
Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 26.
1. From the report that you want to export, at the top right of the content pane, click Export.
2. In the Export Report dialog box, choose the format.
3. Click either Export Now or Schedule.
If you choose Export Now, you will be prompted to complete the operation—open or save file.If you choose Schedule, you will be prompted to configure several settings, as shown in Scheduling Exported Reports.
Export the report as
Choose among the standard formats.Note: Dashboards can be exported only in HTML format.
• CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as Microsoft Access.
• Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS Excel-specific features.
• XML (.xml). Use this format to access the web page components.
• PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy distribution and printing.
• HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data as a web page.
Note: The Export-to-HTML process produces a .zip file with all the necessary files. Extract the files and then click on report.html to display the report. Depending on your browser’s settings, the file will be saved to your default location (typically, Desktop), or a dialog box launches and requires that you specify the location for the file.
34 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Scheduling Exported ReportsWhen you schedule a report to be exported on a regular basis, you must first configure a number of settings.
See Expression Builder for details.
Exporting Reports 35
Use the following table to configure a schedule:
Export
To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the Export drop-down list:• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured
and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s Guide.
• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.• Weekly -
• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
• Monthly - • On the. Select the day on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.
Export to the path:*
This feature enables you to deploy reports that are viewed by a large audience on a regular basis.Specify a path where the output will be saved, for example, a web server directory. You can append sub-directory information to the beginning of the default path name (/opt/aptare/export). Then, click Validate to ensure that your path specification will work.Note: The scheduler will substitute the underscore character for invalid characters.FOR ADVANCED USERS: In some cases (for example, Managed Services Providers with hundreds of managed server groups), you may want to export to specific server group or report directories. Rather than configure each of these separately, you can use the following variables in the path specification to generate an individual report for each instance of the variable:
${serverGroup}For example: /opt/aptare/export/${serverGroup}/doc
${reportName}
To over-write/replace files each time the reports are exported, use the variables: ${day}, ${month}, ${year}where the day, month, and year are represented as 2-digits, such as 02.
36 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Generate reports for:
Choose one of the following:• Existing scope - Creates a single report based on the report’s
scope.• Matching server groups - Creates multiple reports, based on
the list that results from the Expression Builder. See Match server groups on: below.
Note: Dashboards cannot be exported for multiple server groups.
Expression BuilderMatch server groups on:
You can specify a regular expression to be used for searching for server group with pattern matching. Then, click Builder to launch the Expression Builder window where you can Evaluate the regular expression to see which server groups are selected.Examples:.*NetBackup.* - the period specifies any character; the asterisk specifies zero or more of the preceding element.
[abc] - simple alpha character match[a-zA-Z] - any alpha character in upper or lowercase[^abc] - any character except a, b, or c
Note: The Expression Builder is case-sensitive.
For additional regular expression details and examples, see: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression
Exporting Reports 37
Emailing Reports After you generate a report and the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane, the Portal displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to instantly email the report. You can email a report to yourself, other individuals, or a distribution list. The Email Report feature comprises both the email function and the report scheduling function. If you want a report to be emailed on a regular basis, see Scheduling Emailed Reports.
To email a report:
BeforeYou
Begin
Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 26.
1. From the report that you want to email, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Email.
2. The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for parameters.
3. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:
38 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
4. Only saved reports can be scheduled for delivery on a regular basis (see Scheduling Emailed Reports). Click Email Now for reports that have not been saved or if you simply want to email a saved report immediately.
Scheduling Emailed ReportsWhen you schedule a report, you actually are configuring it to run and be emailed at regular intervals. To schedule a report, you must first save it. Then, after you generate the saved report, you can configure it to run and be emailed on a regular basis.
To email a report at regularly scheduled intervals:
BeforeYou
Begin
Generate the report if you have not already done so, and then save it. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 26.
1. From the saved report that you want to schedule, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Email.
The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for additional parameters.
EmailWhen you email a report, you do so instantly—Now. However, you also can schedule a saved report, as described in “Scheduling Emailed Reports” on page 39. The other options in this list are relevant to scheduling report emails at regular intervals.
Email as
• CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as Microsoft Access.
• Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS Excel-specific features.
• PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy distribution and printing.
• HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data as a web page.
• Image (.gif). Use this image format as a read-only choice.Email to Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.Subject Specify an email subject if you want to override the report title.
Use Live links
Sometimes reports contain hyperlinks. When you email a report that contains links, these links remain active unless the report instance no longer appears in the Reporting Database. For security purposes, you might not want the links active, in the event that a report user becomes unauthorized to view the report in the future.
Emailing Reports 39
40 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
2. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:
To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the Email drop-down list: Defined Schedule, Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s Guide.
• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.• Weekly -
• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
• Monthly - • On the. Select the day on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.Email as Currently, the only available option is HTML.Email to Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.
Email if emptyThis option is available only when you are scheduling a tabular report to be emailed at regular intervals. Sometimes reports might not have any data. If you don’t want to email empty reports, choose No.
Emailing Reports 41
Scheduled Reports AdministrationThe scheduled reports that you can access depend on your user type: • If you are an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and all users’ scheduled
reports.• If you are not an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and those that belong to
other users in your home group.
From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.
See Expression Builder for details.Note: The Scheduled Reports Administration options will differ depending on how the report was scheduled, either as an email or a file export. Refer to Scheduling Emailed Reports and Scheduling Exported Reports for details.
42 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Deleting Scheduled ReportsScheduled reports can be deleted by first viewing the list of scheduled reports and then deleting selected reports.
To delete a scheduled report:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.
A list of scheduled reports appears in the Scheduled Reports Administration window.2. Use the typical Ctrl-click and Shift-click mouse functions to select reports and then click
Delete.
Scheduled Reports Administration 43
AlertingUse the alerting feature to notify you when a tabular report has been populated with data. For example, save a Job Summary report for Failed Events and then configure an alert for this report. The Portal will check, according to the schedule you select, for a report that contains data.An alert can be delivered via the following mechanisms, described in detail later in this section:• Email• Script• SNMP
Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report InstanceAlerting can be configured for any report that contains a single table.Use the following procedure to configure an alert for a report.
1. Save a report instance.
2. Generate the saved instance.
3. Right-click in the report window to launch the Alerting window.
4. Use the following table to configure an alert:
44 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
5. Click OK to save the alert configuration.
6. To view the alerts, select Report > My Scheduled Reports. For details on managing alerts in the Scheduled Reports list, see Scheduled Reports Administration.
Schedule an Alert
To Schedule a report to be checked for alerts on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the drop-down list:• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured
and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s Guide.
• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.• Weekly -
• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will be checked.
• At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.• Monthly -
• On the. Select the day on which the report will be checked.
• At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.
The Portal can check the same report multiple times in a single day.
Email Check the box and provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.
Script
The user-created script needs to reside in: /opt/aptare/user_scripts
Check the box and enter a shell script name (UNIX). If a path name is included, it will be appended to the above path. For example, filter a report to include only the columns that will supply values to your ticketing system. The script should include variables that match the report columns so that the values can be passed on to your ticketing system.
SNMP
When you check this box, the Port, Community string, and Management servers fields will be populated from the configured defaults. To override the defaults, overwrite any or all of the three SNMP fields.Administrators: To configure SNMP default values, see Adding/Configuring a Domain in the Application Administrator’s Guide.
Alerting 45
Sharing Reports You cannot share report templates, but you can share saved report instances. This procedure assumes that you already created and saved the report that you want to share. You can share a report with any number of users or user groups, however, the users must be part of a group.
To share a report:
1. From the report that you want to share, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Share.
A pop-up window presents you with a list of users and groups.2. Select any number of users or user groups using typical Ctrl-click and Shift-click actions
and then click Share.
To access reports that you shared with others:
From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Shared Reports.
To access reports that others shared with you:
From the Portal Navigation pane at the left of the window, click on the Shared Reports menu group.
Technical Community SharingA Community News Group offers a forum for sharing not only product news, but tips, questions, and strategies for using various products and reports. In addition, Report Template Designer SQL queries are posted in the forum’s Report Exchange.The Forum is accessible in the following ways:
• In the Portal: Help > Forum• URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com
Adding Notes to Backup Job DetailsNotes associated with backup job details enable you to fulfill compliance audit requirements. When a backup job fails, you can use notes to document remediation steps taken.You can attach a note to a backup job’s detail. You can use notes to:• Specify the cause of a failed job, and how you or a third party resolved the problem.• Provide an audit trail.• Share information with others.
46 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For details about notes, see the Job Details Report. Also, see Example of Listing Jobs With Notes.
Adding Notes to Backup Job Details 47
48 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 4Chapter 2Organizing Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Task Overview: Organizing Reports• Creating Dashboards• Adding Reports to Dashboards• Deleting Reports from Dashboards• Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group• Creating a Custom Menu Group• Changing Your Home Page
Task Overview: Organizing ReportsSo that you can easily retrieve your reports, consider using the following features to organize your reports:• Dashboards• My Reports• Custom Menu Group• Home Page Setup
To organize your reports, perform the following sequence of steps: Task For Instructions1. If you have reports that you need to access daily
or throughout the day, create dashboards and add reports to those dashboards.
• Creating Dashboards• Adding Reports to Dashboards
2. If you have reports that you need to access regularly, add those reports to My Reports.
• Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group
3. Organize your reports into logical groupings by creating custom menu groups.
• Creating a Custom Menu Group
Task Overview: Organizing Reports 49
Creating DashboardsDashboards provide easy access to your reports. A dashboard is a canvas to which you can drag and drop reports. Consider creating a dashboard to contain reports that you need to access regularly and quickly. More importantly, use dashboards to view multiple scenarios simultaneously. The Portal provides several default dashboards, and you can easily create your own.Use dashboards to combine multiple reports into one view:• To monitor running jobs for three different backup servers, run each independent report and
then group them into a single dashboard.• To troubleshoot a particular backup problem, you can gather data from multiple reports in
one view.
Dashboard Example
By correlating data from multiple reports, you can determine if your storage units are functioning properly. 1. Using the Real Time Library and Drive Status report, you can determine if drives are
available.
2. Then, in the Running and Queued Jobs Summary, you can see what jobs are currently running.
If there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage unit, something may be preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running status.
Note: If you need to access specific reports regularly and quickly, but do not need to view these reports simultaneously because the reports are independent of each other, simply add these reports to your My Reports menu group instead.
To create a dashboard:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > New Dashboard. The New Dashboard dialog box appears.
You also can create a new dashboard by right-clicking in any part of the Portal window (even within a report) and then selecting New Dashboard.
2. Generate each report that you want to be included in the dashboard you are developing.
3. Once all of the reports are generated, click on the tab of the New Dashboard that you started.
4. Click and drag the tab of each report that you want to place into the dashboard. These reports will become “portlets” within the dashboard.
You’ll notice as you drag the report into the dashboard, a blank grayed-out pane appears before the report docks in the dashboard. Once the portlets are placed in a dashboard, you can re-position them by dragging them to a new position.
Add the relevant reports to your dashboard. Go to “Adding Reports to Dashboards” on page 51.
50 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Adding Reports to DashboardsYou can add report instances that you create to a personal dashboard. There is no limit to the number of reports that you can add to a personal dashboard. Each time you add a report to your dashboard, the reports appear side by side in the same window pane. Note: A report that has been generated as a result of a drill-down in another report cannot be saved or added to a dashboard.
To add a report to a new dashboard:
1. From the report, right-click on the chart and choose New Dashboard.
2. In the New Dashboard text box, type the name of the dashboard and click Create.
To add reports to an existing dashboard:
1. Generate the dashboard, as shown in the previous procedure.
2. From the Navigation pane, click on the report that you want to add to your dashboard and generate that report.
3. Go to the tab of the report at the top of the window and drag the report to your Dashboard menu group. This report will become a “portlet” within the dashboard.
Dashboard Example
Adding Reports to Dashboards 51
To add saved reports to an existing dashboard:
1. Create a new dashboard or open an existing dashboard.
2. Grab the saved report name from the menu list at the left of the Portal window and drag it into the dashboard, dropping it into place when you see a gray rectangle, as shown in the following example:
Deleting Reports from DashboardsAs you use your custom-designed dashboards, you may find that some reports aren’t relevant to the context that you’ve created.
To remove a report from a dashboard:
From the dashboard, right-click on the report portlet that you want to remove, then click Remove Portlet From Dashboard.
52 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Adding Reports to a Custom Menu GroupIf you need to access specific and unrelated reports regularly and quickly, simply add these saved report instances to your My Reports menu group or a Custom Menu group (see Creating a Custom Menu Group). Both custom report templates and saved report instances can be placed into this group. This section describes the process of adding saved report instances to My Reports.
To add reports to My Reports or a custom menu group:
1. Click on the report instance and drag it on top of the My Reports or custom menu group.
When you drag a report to the My Reports menu group, place the report name on top of the menu group label before dropping it into the group.
When you place a saved report instance into this menu group, the menu item simply points to the actual report instance. Therefore, if you delete the saved report instance, it automatically will be removed from My Reports or the custom menu group.
Creating a Custom Menu GroupOnce you have accumulated several saved report instances and report templates, you may find that you can better organize them by creating your own menu groups within the My Reports group.
To create a Custom Menu Group in the My Reports group:
1. Right-click on top of My Reports and select New Menu Group.
2. Drag saved report instances and drop them onto the name of this Custom Menu Group.
3. You can right-click and take the following actions:
Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group 53
Changing Your Home PageThe Home page is associated with a User and it is displayed when the user logs in. the Portal ships with a default home page, however, each user can set a different report as his home page. To display your home page:From the Portal Toolbar, select Report > Go To My Homepage.To change your home page:From the report, right-click on the chart or table, then choose Set As My Homepage.
In the top left of the window, you’ll see the status of this action: Homepage set...
54 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
5Chapter 2Custom Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Using Report Template Designer• Creating a Custom Report Template• Configure Report Designer Components• Specify the SQL Query• Sample Queries• Using Functions in Queries• Format the Output• Edit a Custom Report Template• Exporting/Importing Report Templates
About Custom ReportsThe Portal comes packaged with a set of default report templates. You can customize these Backup Manager and Capacity Manager templates in a number of ways:• narrow the report scope to specific server groups• modify parameters, such as the time period or event type.
After you have customized a default report, you can save it with its new parameters for on-going use. See About the Report Designer for details.In addition to customizing default report templates, you can create your own dashboards to combine several reports into one view. See Creating Dashboards for details.Once you’ve become familiar with the default reports and also the types of data collected, you may want to design reports that serve your unique reporting needs. See Using Report Template Designer for details.
About Custom Reports 55
Using Report Template Designer Use the Report Template Designer to create custom reports. To access custom reports created by other StorageConsole users, go to the Report Exchange section of the Community Forum: Help > Forum
To create a custom report template:From the Portal toolbar, select Report > Template Designer.
The initial display of the Report Template Designer window begins with the Report Designer components. In this window, you can either:
56 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
• Select components to be used to construct the report template.• Configure components to customize the way they are presented in the Report Template. See
Configure Report Designer Components.
To navigate the Report Template Designer, use either the tabs at the top of the window, or click Next at the bottom of the window.
1. Report Designer
2. Query
3. Formatting
4. Save & Share
Using Report Template Designer 57
Report Designer
Using the checkboxes, specify which parameters you want the user to specify in the Report Designer window, when the report is generated. • Date Range• Time Period - See Date Range for particulars.• Server Groups and Client Scope - See Server Groups and Client Scope.• Custom Text Fields - See Custom Text Fields for a description and
example.• Custom Combo Box - See Custom Combo Box for details.
To customize any of the above options, see Configure Report Designer Components.After you complete the selections within the tabbed Report Designer window, click on Next to go to the Query window where you will Specify the SQL Query.
Query The Query provides a window in which you must type your SQL statement. In addition, a list of valid database views and fields can be used to create your select statement. When you click Validate, the Report Designer checks your SQL statement for valid syntax before you can exit the designer. See Specify the SQL Query.
Formatting To format the output for a report template, select the information that you want included in the report, as well as the report output style—Table, Bar Chart, or Pie Chart. See Format the Output.
Save & Share
Save and share custom report templates with others. You can select individual users or groups, and also the menu group in which it will appear. Once you have saved a report template, you can edit the template. See Edit a Custom Report Template.
58 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Creating a Custom Report TemplateThe Report Template Designer supports select statements. You cannot specify UPDATE, DROP, ALTER, or CREATE statements. After creating a Custom SQL report, it can be saved and shared for future use. When you save the report, you can select the report group under which it will appear in the Navigation pane.Using the Report Template Designer, take the following steps to create custom reports for your environment:• Configure Report Designer Components• Specify the SQL Query• Format the Output
Configure Report Designer ComponentsWhen you create a Custom Report, you can provide the user with a Report Designer interface, similar to the out-of-the box StorageConsole reports. Then, each time a report instance is generated from the Report Template, the user can select parameters to be used for report generation.
Date RangeConfigure this component to provide the time with the date range. Choose Yes or No to specify if the time will be shown along with the date range.
Server Groups and Client ScopeThis Report Designer component enables you to customize how the report will display the server groups’ data.
Use this configuration to specify if the cascade to sub-groups option is available and, if available, the default setting—Checked or Unchecked.
Creating a Custom Report Template 59
Custom Text FieldsThis Report Designer option broadens the capabilities of the custom report query. In the Report Template Designer, a user can define fields that then can be substituted into a query. When the report is generated, the Report Designer window presents the fields that can be selected, thus providing dynamic input for the report instance.This option enables you to create three free-form text fields, where you can specify a field that you want to use in your query. For example, you might enter Host Name, so that when you form the query, you can specify a host name to be inserted into the query.
Example
The following steps illustrate the advantage of Custom Text Fields.1. In the Report Template Designer, select the Custom Text Fields component and click
Configure.
2. In the Custom Text Fields configuration window, define a field named Host ID and click OK.
3. To use this newly configured Custom Text Field, be sure to select the checkbox.
4. In the Query window, enter the following SQL query by typing a partial statement and then double-clicking to select fields:
60 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
select * from aps_v_host_volume where host_id > ${freeText1}
This query can be constructed by combining typing with double-clicking selections in the window, as shown in the following example:
The resulting query will be:select * from aps_v_host_volume where aps_v_host_volume.host_id < ${freeText1}
5. Click Validate Query.
6. In the Formatting window, select all the fields for a table.
7. Save the report template with a name and a menu group.
8. Generate the report from this report template and in its Report Designer window, provide a value for the Host ID field. This value will be passed to the query.
Creating a Custom Report Template 61
Custom Combo BoxThe Report Designer component enables the flexibility of offering the selection of various characteristics when the report is generated—similar to the way the out-of-the-box reports handle options, such as Event Type or Job Type.Specify a heading, along with a list of values that will be displayed as a drop-down selection.
To include a blank or no choice option, specify the list of values in the form:,option 1,option 2
If this no choice option is selected when the report is generated, an empty string will be passed to the SQL expression.
Example of a Combo Box1. Create a Custom Combo Box to enable the user to select all servers for a particular Make:
2. This Combo Box can be used in a query, such as:select * from apt_v_server where apt_v_server.make = '${freeCombo}'
Note: The Combo Box variable is a string, so it must be enclosed in single straight quotes when it will be evaluated with a text field, as shown in the above example.3. Format this report as a table.
4. Save it as List Servers by Make in a Menu Group.
5. Generate a report from this newly saved report template.
In this example, a Combo Box heading was specified with a list of values that will be presented in a drop-down list in the Report Designer, when the user generates the report:
62 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
6. Select a Make from the drop-down list and click Generate.
Creating a Custom Report Template 63
Specify the SQL QueryTo see the available database views and fields that can be used when you create a query, see the StorageConsole Database Programmer’s Guide.1. In the Query window, construct your select statement using the following tips:
• Use the drop-down list at the bottom left of the window to select views and fields.• Use these lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables. • Double-click on fields to insert them into the query with the correct syntax.• Double-click on variables in the list at the right of the window, to insert variables with
proper syntax into the query—for example, ${endDate}• If you checked Server Group and Client Scope in the initial tabbed Report Designer
window, you’ll see that the drop-down list of Report Designer Variables (at the right of the window) includes Report Scope selections. Using these selections, you can enumerate a list of values for Server Groups (serverGroups) and Clients (hosts). For examples of queries, see Sample Queries.
2. Click Validate Query. • Correct the statement before you proceed.• Use the available lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables. • Once the query validates, click Next to proceed to Format the Output.
64 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Sample QueriesThe following queries can serve as a starting point to give you ideas of how to create your own custom queries. In fact, you simply can copy and paste a query from these examples to demonstrate the results in the Report Template Designer.
Technical Community Report SharingAdditional SQL queries are posted by the user community on the News Group Forum (Report Exchange), accessible in the following ways:
• In the Portal: Help > Forum• URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com
Example of a Report of Failed Backup JobsThe following example results in a list of failed jobs.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT apt_v_job.job_id,apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name,
apt_v_job.server_id, apt_v_job.server_name,
apt_v_job.start_date,apt_v_job.vendor_state_name,
apt_v_job.vendor_status_name
FROM apt_v_job
WHERE apt_v_job.summary_status = 2 --Failed jobs
AND apt_v_job.start_date > ${startDate}
AND apt_v_job.start_date < ${endDate}
AND apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})
3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to Select All and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish.
5. When you run this report, specify either a time period or start and end dates. You also can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.
The output will look something like this:
Creating a Custom Report Template 65
Example of a Server Group Membership ListThe following example reports on server group membership, in display name order.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check only Server Groups and Client Scope.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT g.group_name, s.server_id, s.display_name client,
s.hostname, s.ip_address
FROM apt_v_group_member m, apt_v_group g, apt_v_server s
WHERE g.group_id = m.group_id
AND m.child_type = 2 --Server (excludes children that are server groups)
AND m.child_id = s.server_id
AND s.server_id IN (${hosts})
ORDER BY s.display_name, g.group_name
3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish.
5. When you run this report, you can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.
The output will look something like this:
Note that the column header “client” was substituted for the field name, as specified in the query. You can specify similar substitutions using the Formatting window in the Report Template Designer.
6. Since this query is ordered by display name and then group name, it may be more reasonable to display the output in a similar fashion. Use the Formatting tab to re-arrange the table columns (Move Up, Move Down). See Format the Output.
66 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Example of an Exposed Clients ReportThe following example lists the clients within the report scope that have not been backed up within the selected time frame.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id,
apt_v_job.server_name
FROM apt_v_job
WHERE apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})
AND apt_v_job.summary_status IN (0,1) -- Success or Warning
HAVING MAX(start_date) < ${startDate}
GROUP BY apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id,
apt_v_job.server_name
3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish.
5. When you run this report, specify the start and end dates or a time period. So, for example, you could select Last 72 Hours and it will be substituted for startDate, listed in the query. You can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.
The output will look something like this:
Creating a Custom Report Template 67
Example of Listing Jobs With NotesThe following example lists the jobs with notes within the selected time frame, ordered by server, client, job start date, and note entry date. This particular report provides a quick look at jobs that may need attention because someone has attached a note to the job.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT n.note_date, n.user_id, n.user_note, j.client_name, j.server_name,
j.job_type_name, j.start_date, j.finish_date
FROM apt_v_job j, apt_v_job_note n
WHERE j.job_id = n.job_id
AND j.client_id IN (${hosts})
AND j.start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate}
ORDER BY j.server_name, j.client_name, j.start_date, n.note_date
3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish.
5. When you run this report, try these selections:• Time Period: Month-to-Date• Check Cascade into sub-groupsThe output will look something like this:
68 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job TypeThe following example creates a pie chart that represents the various job types—such as, application backups, full backups, incremental backups, and restores—as segments in a pie chart.
1. In the Report Template Designer, do not check any Report Designer items.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT job_type_name,
sum(kilobytes/1024/1024) Job_SIZE_GB
FROM APT_V_NBU_JOB_DETAIL
WHERE
finish_date > sysdate -7
AND job_type_name IS NOT NULL
GROUP BY job_type_name
ORDER BY job_type_name
3. In the Formatting window, select Pie Chart from the Display report as drop-down list.
4. For the Caption field, select job_type_name from the drop-down list.
5. Select all the fields to be displayed.
For a pie chart, you need at least one field to be the caption and another field to be the segment.
6. Click Next, enter a report name and Menu Group. Then, click Finish.
Creating a Custom Report Template 69
7. When you run this report, the output will look something like this:
Example of the SQL Custom Join FeatureBackup Exec data collection does not populate tables related to tape media—for example, apt_v_tape_media. To include this view in a query so that it will work with Backup Exec data, you’ll need to use an “outer join” (as denoted with (+) in the following query). select apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.job_type, apt_v_job_tape_media.media_name, apt_v_job.client_name, to_char(apt_v_job.start_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') start_date, to_char(apt_v_job.finish_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') finish_date, apt_v_job.summary_status, apt_v_job_message_log.message, apt_v_job_tape_media.tape_media_id, apt_v_job.kilobytes
from apt_v_job, apt_v_job_tape_media, apt_v_job_message_log
where apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_tape_media.job_id (+)
and apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_message_log.job_id
and apt_v_job.server_id in (${rp.hosts})
and apt_v_job.start_date BETWEEN ${rp.startDate} AND ${rp.endDate}
ORDER BY apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.start_date
Example of NetBackup Catalog Space by Client ListThis example demonstrates how to include sums of a field.1. In the Report Template Designer, check Server Groups and Client Scope.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT client_host_name, sum(nbr_of_files),sum(nbr_of_files)*150/1024/1024
FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail
WHERE client_id in (${hosts})
AND summary_status is not null
AND expiration_date <= sysdate
GROUP BY client_host_name
ORDER BY sum(nbr_of_files) DESC
3. In the Formatting window, select all the fields to be displayed and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish.
The output will look something like this:
70 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Creating a Custom Report Template 71
Using Functions in QueriesThe following functions can be used to further expand the capabilities of the Report Template Designer custom report templates. Note: In most cases, when inserting a function into a Report Template Designer query, it must be prefaced with: rtd.• secsToHoursMinSecs• getServerGroupContextById• APTlistOfDates• APTgetTapeDriveStatusName• APTgetJobTypeName• listOfBackupWindowDates• getServerAttributeValue• aptStringConcat
secsToHoursMinSecsThis function is useful for converting job duration to a readable format.secsToHoursMinSecs(totalSecs IN NUMBER)
Example Query:select rtd.secsToHoursMinSecs (duration_secs) from apt_v_job
getServerGroupContextByIdThis function provides the capability for getting specific server group data.FUNCTION getServerGroupContextById(
groupID,
clientID,
depthLevel)
This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
Specify the following arguments:
Example Query:select rtd.getServerGroupContextById(100000,server_id,3) from apt_v_server
Argument Name Type Length DescriptiongroupID Number 6 This is the highest level server group to be
accessedclientID Number 6 Specify a specific ID. For the purpose of a SQL
query, insert a field name from a view, as shown in the following example.
depthLevel Number This number indicates the number of levels down the hierarchical server group tree you want the query to search.
72 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTlistOfDatesThis function enables you to provide a list of dates to a query.FUNCTION APTlistOfDates(
startDate IN DATE,
endDate IN DATE,
groupBy IN NUMBER)
This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
Example Query:select * from table(rtd.APTlistOfDates(to_Date('10012008','MMDDYYYY'), to_date('10032008','MMDDYYYY'), 11))
The output from this example:
THE_DATE
--------------------
01-Oct-2008 00:00:00
02-Oct-2008 00:00:00
03-Oct-2008 00:00:00
The third argument—groupBy—controls the granularity of the results, as follows:
Value Description1 Group by 15 minutes2 Group by 30 minutes10 Group by hour11 Group by day12 Group by week13 Group by month14 Group by quarter15 Group by year
Creating a Custom Report Template 73
APTgetTapeDriveStatusNameUse this function to access data from:apt_v_tape_drive
This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
FUNCTION APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(
vendorProductType,
vendorDriveStatus)
Example Query:select rtd.APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(d.product_type, d.vendor_drive_status) from apt_v_tape_drive d
The output from this example:Up
In-Use
In-Use
In-Use
Mounting
Argument Name Type LengthvendorProductType NumbervendorDriveStatus Character 1
74 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTgetJobTypeNameThis function can be used to query database tables related to backup job details, such as apt_v_job and apt_v_nbu_job.
FUNCTION APTgetJobTypeName(
productType,
jobType,
vendorJobType)
This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
Example Query 1:select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, NULL) from apt_v_job j
Example Query 2:select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, n.vendor_job_type)
from apt_v_nbu_job n, apt_v_Job j
where j.job_id = n.job_id
The output from this example:Full Backup
Appl Backup
Appl Backup
Argument Name Type LengthproductType Number 2jobType Number 4vendorJobType Number
Creating a Custom Report Template 75
listOfBackupWindowDatesNote that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
FUNCTION listOfBackupWindowDates(
startDate,
finishDate,
backupWindowList IN apt_BackupWindowListType)
Based on the backup window definition, the above function returns a list of the adjusted start and finish dates.
Example Query:SELECT start_date, finish_date
FROM TABLE(rtd.LISTOFBACKUPWINDOWDATES(TO_DATE('01012008','MMDDYYYY'), to_DATE('01072008','MMDDYYYY'),
apt_BackupWindowListType(
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Mon', 40, 64),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Tue', 64, 88),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Wed', 88, 112),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Thu', 112, 136),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Fri', 136, 160),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sat', 160, 184),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sun', 16, 40)
)
))
The output from this example:12/31/2007 4:00:00 PM 1/1/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/1/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/2/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/2/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/3/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/3/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/4/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/4/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/5/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/5/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/6/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/6/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/7/2008 3:59:59 PM
Argument Name TypestartDate DatefinishDate DatebackupWindowList
76 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
getServerAttributeValueThis function returns a string—the server attribute value.Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
getServerAttributeValue(
serverID,
attributeName)
Example Query 1:select server_id, status
FROM (
select server_id, rtd.getserverattributevalue(server_id,'Status') Status
from apt_v_server s
)
WHERE status IS NOT NULL
order by server_id
aptStringConcatUse this function in a Report Template Designer query to concatenate string values returned from a table.
Example Queryselect aptStringConcat(hostname) from apt_v_server where rownum < 10
This query in the Report Template Designer will generate output similar to:
Argument Name TypeserverID NumberattributeName String in single quotes
Creating a Custom Report Template 77
Format the Output1. From the Formatting tab, specify the following:
• Output style—Display the report as: Table, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, or Pivot Table.Note: When formatting a Pivot Table, only three fields are used (x, y, and a value). Use the Move Up and Move Down feature to position the fields to easily select three fields.
• Fields from the query that you want to include in the report. Select the checkbox of the query field to indicate the fields to be displayed.
• Select the Display Field and click Formatting (at the top of the window) to view the formatting options.
-->Label—You can re-label the displayed fields to something more relevant to your needs.
-->Data alignment—Left, Center, or Right.-->Aggregation: Sum, Average, Minimum, Maximum-->Number, Size, and Date and Time patterns.These patterns are based on the Java
classes SimpleDataFormat and NumberFormat.-->Type: Bar Chart—See Formatting Example—Bar Chart.-->Type: Pie Chart—If you are formatting a Pie Chart, select a character field from
the Caption field drop-down list. The field formatter will show a Type parameter. For pie charts, use numeric fields as pie chart segments. See Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job Type.
-->Type: Pivot Table—See Formatting Example—Pivot Table.
78 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
2. At the bottom of the Formatting window, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to organize the fields in the order that you want them to appear in a tabular report. Be sure to select a row before shifting the fields.
Creating a Custom Report Template 79
3. In the Save & Share window, complete the appropriate text boxes to save and share the report, then click OK. You can choose one or more users and user groups. The saved report template will be listed in the report group that you select.
80 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Formatting Example—Bar ChartThe following example illustrates how to create a Bar Chart and then format it with a dual axis.
1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope.
2. Create a query that has a field for the caption, each of the stacked bars, and the line.
3. In the Formatting tabbed section, select the data points and format each so that you have:• 1 caption, n bars, and 1 lineNote: The line will be charted on the right-hand axis.
Creating a Custom Report Template 81
4. Set the color of the bars.
5. Specify the line formatting.
6. Save the report to the My Reports report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate it.
82 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Formatting Example—Pivot TableThe following example illustrates a key Report Template Designer formatting feature—Pivot Tables. A pivot table provides a useful mechanism for aggregating and summarizing data. In effect, you are taking the flat rows of data and grouping them into a multi-dimensional representation of the data, enabling easier data analysis. When you format this report, you can have only 3 fields of data, which will be represented in the table as the row, column, and data.
1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope and also Custom Combo Box.
2. Select Custom Combo Box and click Configure at the bottom of the Query window.
3. Enter the heading for the drop-down combo box—in this example, Job Size by...
4. Enter the following comma-separated list of values and then click OK: master_host_name, client_host_name, policy_name, policy_type_name, schedule_name, schedule_type_name, storage_unit_label
These will be the options that a user can select when generating a report instance.
Creating a Custom Report Template 83
5. Click on the Query tab and enter the following query:SELECT to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY') run_date, to_char(${freeCombo}) unit, trunc(sum(kilobytes/1024/1024)) size_gb
FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detailWHERE start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate}
AND client_id in (${hosts})
GROUP BY to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY'), ${freeCombo}
6. Click Validate Query and then Next.
7. In the Formatting window, select all three fields: run_date, unit, and size_gb
8. Save the report to a report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate it.
84 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Edit a Custom Report TemplateOnce you have saved a custom-designed report template, you can return to it to edit its configuration. For example, you can modify the SQL query or share it with additional users.
To edit a custom report template:Right-click on the report template name in the menu group (at the left of the Portal window) and select Edit Report Template.
The Report Template Designer launches so that you can modify the settings.
Editing Report Designer Components
When editing any of the Report Designer components listed in the first Report Template Designer window, be sure to first select the component and then click Configure, as shown in the following example:
Creating a Custom Report Template 85
86 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Exporting/Importing Report TemplatesIn support of Web 2.0 community sharing, custom report templates can be exported to a file (.rtd) and then imported into another environment. This feature broadens the access to already developed, unique reports that may be ideal for your environment.
Export a Report TemplateTo export a custom-designed report template from your Portal to a .rtd file:1. Create and save a custom report template using the instructions in Creating a Custom
Report Template.
2. In the Report Navigator pane, right-click on the saved report template and choose Export Report Template.
3. When you confirm your export action in the next window, you are taken to the typical browser “open/save file” window.
4. Click Save File and OK to save this .rtd file so that it can be shared and imported by others.
5. To Import a Report Template, see Import a Report Template.
Import a Report TemplateTo import a custom-designed report template, follow these steps.1. In the toolbar at the top of the Portal window, select Report > Import Template.
2. From the drop-down list, select the destination report folder for the imported template.
3. Browse your local system for the saved template (.rtd) file, select it and click OK.
The imported template will appear in the folder you specified and now can be generated.4. To Export a Report Template, see Export a Report Template.
RECOMMENDATION: Visit the Report Exchange at the online Community Forum for report templates that you can import into your Portal. See Technical Community Report Sharing.
Exporting/Importing Report Templates 87
88 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]][=‘qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 6Chapter 2System Administration Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Collector Message Summary• Data Collection Message Detail• Database Error Summary• Report Activity Summary• Report Activity Detail• Monitoring Data Collection Status• Top Running Reports• Version History
89
Collector Message SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Collector Message SummaryThe Collector Message Summary report lists issues that occurred during the data collection process. Use this report to identify the reason for missing backup and storage capacity status.Currently, data collection messages are available only for:• Legato NetWorker• HP Data Protector• Capacity Manager Host Resources
Data Collection Messages can be filtered (in the Report Designer) by the following criteria:• by Host (see example above)• by Data Collector
90 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
• by Child Thread
Collection Message SummaryThis report is accessed via the Error Occurrences drilldown link in the Collector Message Summary.
Collector Message Summary 91
Data Collection Message DetailThis report is accessed via the Last Message Date drilldown link in the Collection Message Summary.
92 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Database Error SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Database Error SummaryThis report provides a diagnostic tool for System Administrators to monitor typical operational functions. More often than not, you will be requested by Customer Care Group to use this diagnostic tool and email the report to them for further investigation. Entries in this report do not necessarily signal problems that require corrective action. For example, if a user inadvertently attempts to create a Domain Name that already exists, an entry will be written to the database error log file and also displayed in this report. Ideally, this report will rarely list errors that require additional actions, but periodic monitoring is recommended.Note: Given that this report extracts customer-specific database messages from a log file, System Administrators should ensure that only authorized personnel are given access to this report.
Database Error Summary 93
Report Activity SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Database Error SummaryThis report presents a graphical representation of the aggregate of the time for Portal report generation. • Mouse over a bar to view the total elapsed time. • Click on a bar to view the Report Activity Detail.
Report Activity DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Database Error SummaryThen, click on a bar in the graph.
94 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Monitoring Data Collection StatusThe details the Data Collection Status tool can be found in the Application Administrator’s Guide. The following step illustrates the ability to access these reports from the Data Collection Status window.1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Tools > Data Collection Status.
2. Expand a product folder.
Note: Currently, messages are available only for Legato NetWorker, HP Data Protector, and Capacity Manager Host Resources. Therefore, the View Messages button will not be accessible for other types of messages.
Monitoring Data Collection Status 95
Top Running ReportsUsing this report, you can list the reports that have been running for long periods of time or that have run an excessive number of times. A report will be listed as Top Running, based on its overall cost to the system, determined by the average execution time * run count. By default, the most costly reports are listed first. Note that the average execution time includes not only the database query, but also the time associated with building the report on the Portal server.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Top Running ReportsSelect the time range for the list in the Report Designer.
Click the Run Count link to view Top Running Report Details.
Dashboard ConsiderationsA dashboard that contains four different reports (portlets) will appear in this Top Running Reports list as four separate records. This summary does not display a row for the high-level dashboard, just the reports contained within the dashboard. • If the portlet within the dashboard is a saved instance of a report, the name of the saved
instance will be displayed in the Report Name column.• If the portlet is not a saved instance—that is, it was simply generated and dragged into the
dashboard—then Dashboard Report will be displayed in the Report Name column.
Top Running Report DetailsThe Run Count in the Top Running Reports Summary provides access to the list of reports that have consumed higher than average resources. Use this list to determine if any actions need to be taken. For example:• Adjust the scope of the report to narrow the content. • Schedule certain top running reports to be run at off hours.• Verify that automatically schedule reports are scheduled appropriately and are not running
more frequently than is required.• Consider scheduling frequently run reports to run once, with file system exports or emails to
users.
96 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Top Running Reports 97
Version HistoryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Version HistoryThe Version History report lists the installation and upgrade events so that you can determine the current version and history of StorageConsole software upgrades. This report enables you to verify that the latest patches have been installed.The Status indicates the success or failure of the installation/upgrade process. The Comments, if available, are derived from the process as well. In many cases, there won’t be any specific comments related to the upgrade.
98 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 7Chapter 2Backup Manager Management Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis• Job Status Summary• Job Summary Report• Job Details Report• Job Volume Summary Report• Job Duration Report• Error Log Summary• Consecutive Errors By Client• Largest Backup Volume• Monthly Backup Summary• Job Summary By Server• Running and Queued Job Summary• HPD Session Summary
99
Using Backup Manager Reports for AnalysisManagement Reports offer a variety of ways to view data. Using high-level reports, you can quickly summarize your backup status and then when needed, drill down to the details. The Portal reports will quickly replace your command-line tasks that you use to cobble together event status information.These management reports can aid in troubleshooting to:• diagnose malfunctioning servers• determine scheduling conflicts• analyze throughput issues• identify storage media degradation
The following table lists several examples of exposure analysis tasks and the reports that support your diagnostic efforts.
What to do: How to do it:1. Determine the status of your backup
jobs.• What failed and how severely?• Why did a job take so long?• Did another job hold it up?
Refer to Job Status Summary.
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary
Drill down to details.2. Diagnose backup scheduling issues. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job
Duration ReportBackup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary• From this report, you can click on a bar to drill down to
details in the Job Summary report.3. Diagnose server problems. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log
Summary• Use the default, Group by Server option.
4. Diagnose client problems. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Consecutive Errors By Client• Drilldown to investigate error conditions.• Use the Consecutive Errors by Client report in
conjunction with the Error Log Summary, which displays specific error code messages.
100 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Job Status Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status SummaryThe Job Status Summary report shows a bar chart that aggregates jobs that succeeded, failed, or produced warning messages. This high-level summary provides drilldown access to the Job Summary report, where you’ll find specific status messages and scheduling information.When you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available for this report.
Use this procedure to track down backup failure details:1. View the Job Status Summary report.
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary2. Click on the top section of a bar in the bar chart to drill down to details.
The top portion of the bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom represents successful backups. Note that often the partial backups represent your biggest exposure, so drilling down on the warning events can help you identify and resolve issues.When you drill down to details, you are launching the Job Summary Report.
3. In the Job Summary report, view the Job Status column for backup log messages.
4. In the Job Summary report, click on the Finish Date to view the Job Details Report, which shows additional message-log entries. Be sure to scroll down to the bottom of the list to find backup attempts and notes related to the job.
Related reports:• Job Summary Report. This tabular report provides details related to the data represented in
the bars shown in the Job Status Summary chart. You can drill down to the job summary details from the Job Status Summary bar chart.
• Backup Status SLA Report. In addition to job status, this report provides indicators showing a trend line of event successes.
1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart
2. Pop-up Details
3. Job Failures
Job Status Summary 101
The Job Status Summary provides the following information:
Drillable Stacked Bar Chart
Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for the backups corresponding to the time period and event status for the bar that you selected. The top portion of each bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom section represents successful backups.
Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.
Job Failures The triangle symbol in the chart tracks to the right y-axis and provides at-a-glance backup performance statistics—specifically, it reports the event failures as a percentage of the total events for the selected time period.
102 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Job Summary ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job SummaryWhen you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available for this report.This report also can be launched from a number of other reports:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary
• In the Job Status Summary, click a section of a bar to select the job summary by exit code: event failures, event warnings, or successful backups.
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration• In the Job Duration report, click on a bar for a specific time period.
In the Report Designer, use the following options to filter the output:• Event Type: All Backup & Restore Events, All Backup Events, Full Backups, Incremental
Backups, Restores• Event Status: All Events, Successful Events, Warning Events, Successful or Warning Events,
Failed Events
Client Click on a client name for a job to view/update the client server details.Server The management server nameProduct Vendor-specific backup software
TypeThe type of backup job: full backup, incremental, archive, storage pool backup, reclamation, migration, application backup, duplication, vault, expiration, restore, or command.
Start Date Date and time of the beginning of the backup jobFinish Date Click on this link to launch the Job Details Report.Duration Backup job durationWritten Amount written to the backup mediaMBytes/Sec Backup throughput
Job Summary Report 103
Note: For HP Data Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a session.
Job Summary Advanced OptionsIn the Job Summary Report Designer, click Advanced to access several advanced options, as shown below.
The report time period is always in the master server’s time. If you select Advanced options and change the time zone, the jobs that are returned are based on the time zone applied to the job start/finish date. The displayed dates are always in the master server time zone; just the selection of jobs that qualifies in the report time period changes.
Exit Code Indicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, FailedFor failed jobs, place your mouse on top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip.
# of Files The number of files written to the backup mediaTapes Click on a tape link to launch a Tape Details Report.
104 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Job Details ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job SummarySeveral reports—for example, Job Summary Report—contain a Finish Date link, which launches a Job Details report.Note: For NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs, the Job Details report may include a View Files button. This option is available if the server has been configured to Capture File Details. See Capture File Details in the Application Administrator’s Guide. This feature should be used only for critical servers, as it may impact performance.
Job Details Report 105
In the Backup Files Navigator, use the typical click and double-click actions to expand/collapse folders to view specific files.
Job Details The first column in the job detail provides a complete breakdown of the job. To get information about the client, management server, or media server, click on their respective links. The actual job details depend on your report.
Client Click the client name to view the Server Details Report.
Node Name Displayed only for TSM jobs.
Vendor Product
Vendor-specific backup software.
Job ID Backup job unique identifier, assigned by the backup software.
Backup ID Unique backup ID.
Job Type One of the following: Full Backup, Incremental Backup, Restore.
Job Status Reflects the success of the job: Partial, Successful, Failed.
Job State Indicates if the job actually finished running.
Result Code
This vendor-specific code can be used to track down troubleshooting tips in the backup vendor’s reference guides.
Scheduled Start Time
The planned date and time of the job’s initiation.
Actual Start Date
Date and time of the beginning of the backup job.
Actual Finish Date
Date and time when the backup job ended.
Duration Backup job duration.
Time zone The time zone where the job ran.
106 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Details
The second column of this report provides server particulars.
Policy and Schedule Details
Click on the policy or schedule name to go to the policy/schedule detail page, which provides even more details about the policy and schedule that governs the job.
Paths and Related Jobs
The paths being backed up for the job are displayed in a comma-delimited list. When there are multiple related jobs, each of the jobs and associated paths is displayed in the related jobs listing. Clicking on any of the related job IDs will take you to the Job Details report.
Backup Image
Click on the Media Name to access additional details in the Tape Details report.
Job Attempts
When there are re-try attempts for any given job, each attempt will be listed in the attempts section at the bottom of the Job Detail. Each attempt row displays details of that attempt, including but not limited to, the backup ID, backup status, started writing date, finished writing date, and transfer rate.
Server Click the Server name to launch the Server Details Report.
Total Capacity Server’s capacity in MB.
# of Tapes Number of tapes used by this backup job.
# of Files Number of files backed up by this job.
Tape IDs Which tapes were used by the job.
Storage Unit Physical device name.
File List Directory path of the file list location.
Policy Name Click the policy name to launch the Policy Details screen.
Policy Type Assigned by the System Administrator.
Policy Domain Displayed only for TSM jobs.
Schedule Click the schedule name to launch the Policy Details screen.
Schedule Type
Compressed/Encrypted
Indicates how the backup data was treated.
Job Details Report 107
Adding a Note to a JobAs you view the Job Details report, you can add a note that will remain attached to the job. The note automatically supplies your email address and the date the note was added. You supply a message. This feature offers an essential audit trail capability to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance.
To add a note to a job:1. Launch the Job Details report from the Job Summary report.
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Job Summary2. In the Job Summary report, click a Finish Date link to display the Job Details report.
3. In the Job Details report, right-click and then select Add a Note.
In a similar fashion, you can clear all notes.Tip: When you add a note to a job or clear all notes, you’ll need to refresh the Job Detail page so that you can view the results of your action.
108 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Job Volume Summary Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume SummaryThe Job Volume Summary report shows the number of files and amount of data (in KB) that you backed up for a specified time period. While the Job Status Summary report approaches the data from an “event status” point of view, the Job Volume Summary report presents data from the perspective of “how much” has been backed up, with a focus on determining if your scheduling is balanced.The true value of this high-level report is its ease of use. At a glance—and with a few mouse clicks—you can ascertain problematic time periods, consumption trends, and scheduling peaks.
Use this procedure to analyze volume usage trends:1. View the Job Volume Summary report.
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary2. Mouse-over a triangle at the top of a bar that indicates a peak usage period.
A pop-up displays the number of files that were backed up for that period.3. Click anywhere on the bar to launch the Job Summary Report.
In the Job Summary report, pay attention to the data in the following columns: Duration, Written, MBytes/Sec, Exit Code and Job Status. This data gives you an idea of which jobs have over-tasked your storage. Remember that you can sort the report columns to group jobs that took the longest or that failed.
The Job Volume Summary report provides the following information:
1. Drillable Bar Chart
2. Pop-up Details
3. Backup Volume
4. Backup Files
Drillable Bar Chart
Click on any of the bars to go to a Job Summary Report page for the backups that correspond to the time period of the bar that you selected.
Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.• Bar: Displays the volume of data backed up for the associated time period.• Triangle symbol: Displays the total number of files backed up.
Backup Volume Lists the amount of data backed up.Backup Files Lists the # of files backed up.
Job Volume Summary Report 109
Job Duration Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job DurationThe Job Duration report combines into one view, information about both backup and restore duration. If, on a specific day, there were two backup events that completed after 1 hour and 3 hours respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of 4.5 hours.You can also report on a single event type:
• All Backup Events• Full Backups• Incremental Backups• Restores
The Job Duration report provides the following information:
Use this report as a starting point to determine why certain days show excessive backup durations.
To diagnose excessive backup durations:
1. View the Job Duration bar chart, looking for excessive duration times.
1. Drillable Bars in Chart
2. Pop-up Details
3. Duration
Drillable Bars in Chart
Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for all corresponding events.
Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.This pop-up lists the total duration for the selected time period.
Duration The total amount of time the backup and restore events took to complete. If on a specific day there were two backup events that completed after 1hr and 3hrs respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of 4.5 hours.
110 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
2. Click on the bar for a troublesome day to launch the Job Summary Report.
3. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Duration column header to sort the data by Duration. Now you’ll see excessive client usage at the top of the list. You might also sort by MBytes/Sec to identify throughput issues.
4. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Finish Date of a suspect job to display the Job Details Report.
By using a combination of reports, you can figure out if some jobs held up others, if there are server problems that require your attention, or if consecutive errors are symptomatic of storage device failure or media degradation.
Job Duration Report 111
Error Log Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log SummaryThe Error Log Summary reports backup failure details that have been gleaned from backup error logs. Use this report in conjunction with the Consecutive Errors By Client report to mitigate future problems by determining which types of errors occurred with the greatest frequency.You can customize this summary to report by a specific group:• Server (the default)• Client• Policy
In each of the group views, the Error Code Description typically provides sufficient details to start your troubleshooting process. Refer to the backup product’s reference guides for additional guidance.Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column.
Note:
This report displays a number of links that enable drilldown access to additional details, as described in the following table.
The Error Log Summary provides the following information:
Note: Some of the following fields do not appear in every Error Log Summary. Each of the three report types—Client, Server, Policy—contains only the fields that make sense for its group.Server The server is the system that is managing the storage devices.Client The system that was backed up.IP Address The IP address of the client, shown only in the Error Log Summary By Client report.Policy If you selected Group By Policy through the Report Designer, the policy name
appears in this column. This column does not appear if you selected Group By Management Server.
112 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Product Indicates the backup software running on the server where the error occurred. Refer to that product’s documentation to correlate the error code to diagnose problems.• HP Data Protector• Legato Networker• Symantec Backup Exec• NetBackup• Tivoli Storage Manager
Error Code Numeric code reported by the backup product. Refer to the backup product’s reference guides for troubleshooting advice.
Error Occurrences
Each row in the table displays the number of occurrences for each error code within the report’s selected time frame.Click on any error occurrence to go to the Job Summary report, which lists the events that correspond to that particular error code.
Last Error Date Click on the Last Error Date to go to the Job Summary report, which displays the most recent error events only, including skipped files.
Error Code Description
Each row in the table includes a detailed error description that provides you with valuable information. Since the data is derived from backup job error logs, this description is backup-product dependent.
Error Log Summary 113
Consecutive Errors By Client To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports> Consecutive Errors by ClientUse this report to proactively manage clients and servers. Consecutive errors may portend hardware reliability issues. Using this report you can identify not only consecutive errors, but also the number of consecutive days that the errors persisted.The default order for this listing is descending order, with the clients having the most consecutive errors listed first. Correlate the number of consecutive errors with the number of consecutive days so that you can disregard errors that appear to be intermittent.Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column.Note:
The Consecutive Errors by Client report provides the following information:
Client Name The client is the system that is being backed up.IP Address Client’s IP address on the LAN.Server Name The server is the system that is managing the storage devices. Click on any server
name to link to the Server Details page, which provides you comprehensive information about that server. Then, from the Server Details page, click on the Server Group link to determine the server groups to which this server belongs.
# of Consecutive Errors
# of consecutive errors logged within the designated time frame.Click on the number to launch the related Job Summary report where you’ll find a detailed listed of the errors.
114 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
# of Consecutive Days
# of days in which the client’s consecutive errors were logged.
First/Last Error Dates
Date of the first and last errors, within the specified time frame, gleaned from logs. The range between the first and last error dates gives some insight into the severity of the problem. Click on each of the error dates to generate two separate Job Summary reports so that you can compare the snapshots of the start and end of the error events.
Consecutive Errors By Client 115
Largest Backup VolumeTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Largest Backup VolumeUse this report to identify consumers of your most utilized backup volume. A pie chart graphically represents the usage that also is listed in the legend. This report will help you identify greedy servers or applications.Click the server links in the legend to drill down to details.
The Largest Backup Volume is a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the report scope. • Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections a pop-up will display pertinent server
consumption details.• Click on any section of the pie chart to view the Server Consumption Summary report for that
particular server.
116 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Monthly Backup SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Monthly Backup SummaryorBackup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard
Server Details
Clicking the server name will point you to the Server Details screen which provides detailed information regarding the server including but not limited to: IP Address, ID Number, Make, Model, OS, and Server Group Membership.
Last Backup Details
The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent backup event for each server in their chosen server group. Clicking on the link will take you to the Event Detail screen where you can view backup details:
Last Full Backup Details
The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent fullbackup event for each server in the chosen server group. Clicking on the link will take youto the Event Detail screen where you can view backup details regarding the full backup, including but not limited to: Event Type, Exit Status, Status Description, # of Tapes, TapeID #s, # of Files, and Complete Error Log (if errors occurred).
Event Type
Exit Status The code provided by the backup solution determines this status.
Status Description
The description associated with the backup solution’s exit code.
# of Tapes Number of tapes used for the job.
Tape ID #s Numeric ID of the tapes used.
# of Files Number of files backed up.
Complete Error Log
An error log appears only if errors occurred.
Monthly Backup Summary 117
Job Summary By ServerTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary By ServerThis report displays the number of jobs and their status, for jobs started during the time period that you specified for the report.Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your scope selection.
Correlate the data in this report with the information in the Real Time Library and Drive Status to determine if there are problems with the server. For example, if the Job Summary By Server shows jobs in the queue and the Real Time Library and Drive Status shows available drives, something is preventing the queued jobs from getting to running status.
Note: The report for Legato servers is titled, Real Time Save Set Summary.
Server The backup management server.Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a storage unit. this
value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.
Que Jobs that are queued for an available storage unit. This value is the total currently queued jobs and it is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.
1st Jobs that completed successfully on their first try.2+ Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts.Warnings Jobs that completed, but were partial jobs with one or more warnings.Errors Jobs that completed, but a fatal error occurred.Total Each numeric column is totalled at the bottom of the table.
118 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Running and Queued Job SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Running and Queued Job SummaryNote: Only NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your server group scope selection. For Legato NetWorker, this report is titled, Running Save Sets Summary.
The Running and Queued Jobs Summary displays any job that was running or queued at the time the management servers were polled. Jobs that require attention (long-running, stalled, or slow jobs) will be highlighted in red and moved to the top of the running and queued jobs list so that they are quickly noted by administrators and handled appropriately. Each of these flagged jobs will be accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the type of potential problem.• clock - indicates a long running job (>= 12 hours).• arrow / barrier - indicates a stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes)• snail - indicates and slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)
Server Enables drill down access to the server detailsClient Drill down to Client detailsPolicy Name The name of the backup policy associated with the jobJob ID If applicable, the NetBackup job IDTry (MB) Amount of data attempting to be backed upTry Start Date Date of the attempted backupDuration The length of the backup jobKB/Sec Transfer rateLast Written The date and time of the last write.Indicators • clock - indicates a long running job (>= 12 hours).
• arrow / barrier - indicates a stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes)
• snail - indicates and slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)
Running and Queued Job Summary 119
HPD Session SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > HPD Session SummaryThe Session Summary reports provides an overview of the HP Data Protector backup/restore sessions.
Session Name Backup/restore session nameEvent Type unknown, backup, restoreBackup Type incremental, differential, transaction, full, or deltaSpecification Name of the HP Data Protector backup specificationStart Time Backup/restore start timeEnd Time Backup/restore end timeSuccess Percentage % of backup/restore session that was successful MB Amount of data backed upStatus Session Status: unknown, completed, completed/failures, or failedTapes The tapes used for the backup/restore session
120 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 8Chapter 2Backup Administration Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Operations Dashboard• Command Center Dashboard• Data Protection Dashboard• Message of the Day Report• Server Details Report• Server Group• Mission Control Report• Client Protection Summary• TSM Storage Pools Dashboard• Client Job Histogram
121
Operations Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations Dashboard
The Operations Dashboard provides you with multiple views of your backup environment on a single page.
1. Job Status Summary
2. Current Media Summary
3. Largest Backup Volume Report
4. Storage Unit Status
Job Status Summary
Displays the number of successful, warning and error events for each time period.The dashed yellow line displays the SLA success goal while the triangle symbols track actual achievement for each day.Clicking on any of the bars will take you to the Job Summary Report for the corresponding event status and time frame.
Current Media Summary
Provides a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the servers within the report scope.Mouse-over any of the pie-chart sections to display pop-ups that provide pertinent details about the media of the corresponding status.Click on any section of the pie-chart or the to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media with the corresponding status. Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.
122 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Largest Backup Volume Report
Provides a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the report scope.Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.Click on any section of the pie-chart to go to the Server Consumption Summary Report for a particular server.
Click on the Total Servers link to go to the Server Consumption Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.
Storage Unit Status
Each file system is identified by the file system path, with its management server displayed above the file system graphic. The total number of Storage Units sharing the same file system is also shown. The display of this report is dependent on the backup products in your environment and the report scope.
Each file system is accompanied by a thermometer, which indicates the percentage of space occupied and available on the file system. The Used value is as reported by the operating system, and includes space occupied by all backup images as well as any other files that may reside on that file system. The Free value also is reported by the operating system.
Used and free values of Unknown indicate the Discovery module has not been configured to probe the media servers’ file systems for their physical characteristics.
Operations Dashboard 123
Command Center Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Command Center DashboardThe Command Center Dashboard provides four portlets with a real-time view of your backup environment. Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this dashboard. Also, the dashboard requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your scope selection.
Real Time Job Summary
Displays the number of jobs and the job status for the time period that you selected in the report scope:
You can drill down on any non-zero value to view the Job Summary Report for those corresponding jobs. Additionally, you can drill down further to the more comprehensive Job Detail Report for any individual jobs listed in the summary.
Real Time Library and Drive Status
Summarizes each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s) by the Data Collector.Monitor the health of each library by tracking the number of drives up, down, in use and available within each tape library. When the number of down drives in a library is equal to or greater than 25%, the text for the library’s row is flagged in red.
Run (Running) Currently running jobs that have been assigned to a storage unit.
Que (Queued) Jobs that are queued and waiting for an available storage unit.
1st (1st Attempt) Jobs that completed successfully on the first try.
2+ (2 or More Attempts)
Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts.
Wrn (Warnings) Completed, but there were partial jobs with one or more warnings.
Err (Error) Completed, but a fatal error occurred.
124 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Real Time Storage Unit Utilization
The Real Time Storage Unit Component displays current high-level information for each storage unit in your environment. Each storage unit listed provides you with several columns of pertinent information.
The Drives Up column combined with the Jobs Queued and Jobs Running columns help you determine whether a storage unit is functioning properly. For instance, if there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage unit, there may be something preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running status.
Running and Queued Jobs Summary
Displays any job that was running or queued at the time the Data Collector last polled the management server(s). Click any Job ID # in the list to retrieve comprehensive detail about a specific job.The total number of running jobs displayed on the dashboard is limited. If the number of running and queued jobs exceeds the limit, all the running and queued jobs can be viewed in a separate report by clicking the Total Running and Queued Jobs link.The following jobs require attention, so the report highlights them in red and moves them to the top of the running and queued jobs list. Each of these flagged jobs will be accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the potential problem:
Storage Unit The name of the unit.Media Server Click this link to display the Server Details Report.Type The type of unit, such as Disk, Disk Staging, Media Manager, or
NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol).Total Drives The unit’s configuration.Jobs Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a
storage unit. This value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.
Max Drives Notes the maximum drives per job.Max Multiplex/Drives
The maximum number of concurrent drives.
Clock Long >= 12 hours
Arrow/barrier Slow
<= 200 Kb/sec
Snail Stalled No write activity for >= 15 minutes
Long 12 hours
Slow <200 kilobytes per second
Stalled 1800 seconds (30 mins)
Command Center Dashboard 125
Data Protection Dashboard To access this dashboard, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection DashboardThe Data Protection Dashboard contains the following reports:• Message of the Day Report• Job Status Summary• Mission Control Report• Monthly Backup Summary
In the Data Protection Dashboard Report Designer, in addition to specifying a time period, you also can choose to omit backup retries.
126 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Message of the Day ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection DashboardThis report provides a starting point for handling issues that require immediate attention. Specifically, it lists the failed backups and restores per server. From these lists, you can drill down to the Server Details Report, the Job Summary Report, and the Mission Control Report.
Drill down for additional details:
1. To access the Server Details Report, click a link under the Server column.
2. To access Job Summary reports, click a Finish Date link.
Message of the Day Report 127
Server Details ReportThis report can be accessed from numerous reports via either Client or Server name links:
• Job Summary Report• Consecutive Errors by Client• Disk Usage and Performance• Billing and Chargeback Summary• Server Group listings
Click the server name to go to the Server Details screen for additional information.Note: The output is specific to the server type, as shown in the following examples.
Host AliasesSome servers also may show a list of host aliases in this Server Details report:
128 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Edit Server Details
IP Address The server’s IP address
Location Server location, as supplied by the System Administrator
Make Vendor name, such as IBM or Sun
Model The product’s alphanumeric identifier
OS The specific version of the operating system, such as Solaris 9
Server Details Report 129
Server Group Membership
Click a group link to access the Server Group listing.
Filespaces
The filespace section at the bottom of this report provides the following data (for TSM only):• Node• Filespace• Capacity• Free• Volumes: Click links to access specific volumes.• Storage Pool
130 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Server GroupThis report can be accessed from the Server Details Report. In the Server Details Report, click a Group Member link to list the clients/servers belonging to that server group.
The Server Group table provides the following information. Note that the columns that are shown may vary, depending on the type of server group:
Client Link to the Server Details Report.
Server Link to the Server Details Report for the backup server.
Last Backup Link to the Job Summary Report.
Backups this month The number of the client’s backups for the month.
Product Type The backup software that performed the backups.
Written this Month Number of GB/TB backed up.
Node For TSM servers, the node name
CapacityThe server’s capacity, if it can be determined. In the case of backup clients, the capacity may be unknown to StorageConsole.
Server Group 131
Mission Control Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection DashboardorBackup Manager > Administration Reports > Mission ControlThe Mission Control report provides you with a comprehensive snapshot of your backup and restore event status. Using this report, you can easily identify servers that have had no backups or failed backups. And, you can drilldown to ascertain the root cause of unsuccessful backups. Organizations use this report to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance, as it shows ultimate backup success over time.When you generate this report, the Report Designer prompts you to select scope parameters, including the options to Ignore Retries and also to Exclude Clients with Successful Backups. If the “Exclude Clients with Successful Backups” checkbox was checked in the Report Designer, only clients with at least one “No Jobs” or “Failed” indicator will be shown. Note that if the last column corresponds to the current day and the indicator is “No Jobs” and all other indicators for the row are successful, the row will be considered a “success” and therefore will be excluded from the report.
132 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Note: A row can be expanded to list underlying details for NetBackup, Legato, and HP Data Protector servers. For Tivoli Storage Manager and Backup Exec, an expansion arrow will not be available. Also, the Flashback policy type (used for VM backups) is not supported; however, an expansion arrow may be displayed, with no underlying details available.
1. Event Status
2. Current Date Range
3. Status Indicators
Event Status Displays a row for each server within the report scope. Click on any server name in the list to go to the Server Details page for that server.Some servers will have an arrow next to it, which can be used to expand the server to show the underlying file systems.
Current Date Range
The date range that is currently displayed in the report is always listed at the top of the report. If the date range is beyond the current day, or before your backup environment data started being pushed to the Reporting Database, the event indicator will be “No Jobs.”
Mission Control Report 133
Tailoring the Report Output by Backup ProductIn the Report Designer, click Advanced.
Status Indicators Each day column for every server contains an event status indicator with the following color codes. The indicator always reflects the most serious status if there is more than one event for that server on that day. For example, if there are three successful events and one failure, the indicator will be red.
Click on any of the indicators to go to the Job Summary Report for all events associated with that server on that day. Once in the Job Summary Report, you can drilldown to Job Details and even add a note to indicate the strategy for resolving an issue—thus, providing an audit trail.
Blue Successful events
Yellow Warning events
Red Failed events
134 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Client Protection Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Protection SummaryNote: The Client Protection Summary is available only if you have purchased the optional add-on Discovery module. Therefore, this report is NetBackup-specific.
With the Discovery module, you can use the Client Protection Report Designer to customize and personalize a Client Protection Summary that will identify exposure and threats to an enterprise data protection environment.
The Client Protection Report provides a single-pane view of the protection status for the list of clients or servers. This is a tabular report with the following columns:
Client Protection Summary 135
Clients and File Systems
Lists all clients and devices in the scope of the report along with their key attributes:
Coverage Level
Lists all clients and devices in the scope of the report along with their key attributes:
Client Name
The name of the client or device as returned by the backup software or a dns lookup of the IP address. If the name is not returned by DNS, the report displays the IP address. Click on the client to view the Client Details.
Note: If the discovery process is unable to resolve the name of a client, the IP address will be displayed. To prevent unresolved clients from appearing in the report, clear the Show unresolved hosts check box in the Report Designer.
OS Type The operating system type returned by the discovery process.
Backup Product
Currently, only NetBackup is detected.
Device Drives or file systems uncovered by the discovery process—for example, C:\, /export, and /.
Full
The client is completely protected—that is, an active policy exists that references the complete drive or file system as an include path. For example, the file system /home is referenced as an include path in the policy Unix_servers_home.
Partial
No active policies exist that reference the complete drive or file system. However, one or more active policies exist that reference a subset of the drive or file system as an include path. For example, for the file system /home, the include path /home/fred is referenced in an active policy.
None There are no active policies that reference either the entire or any subset of the drive or file system.
Unknown The coverage level is unknown. Typically, this level is displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.
136 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Protection Status
Lists protection status for each of the drives or file systems:
Last Backups
Lists the date and time of the last successful and last attempted FULL backups for the drive or file system.
Policies Displays the backup policy name, if the drive or file system contains one or more policies. Click on an individual policy to view the policy details.
Exclude Flag
Enables you to exclude specific clients or devices from the report: select the Exclude check box and click Update Settings. The selected client(s) no longer appear in subsequent reports. To subsequently include clients in or exclude clients from the report, select the Show Excluded Clients check box from the Report Designer.
BlueSuccessful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period and one or more active policies provide FULL coverage as defined above.
Yellow Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period, but the active policies only provide PARTIAL coverage.
Red No successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period. Coverage level is irrelevant.
White The protection status and coverage level is unknown. Typically this status is displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.
Client Protection Summary 137
TSM Storage Pools Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > TSM Storage Pools Dashboard
The TSM Storage Pools Dashboard provides a real-time view into capacity and process status information for the selected list of TSM Storage Pools. In a single pane, you quickly can analyze capacity and process status information for each of the Storage Pools.
Storage Pool Capacity
The pie chart displays the percentage and GBytes used and available for the Storage Pool. The GBytes Used is calculated by multiplying the percentage used times the the estimated capacity of the Storage Pool.
138 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Storage Pool Attributes
This section displays the list of storage pool attributes:
Storage Pool Utilization
This is a historical tracking bar chart that displays the history of used and available capacity for the selected storage pool.
Tape Occupancy Summary
This pie chart displays a summary of the GBytes and number of tapes used by each client/server that occupy this Storage Pool. The chart displays the top eight tape media consumers of this Storage Pool. Click on any of the client/server names to view detailed tape media consumption information.
Server Backup Server name
Type Primary, Copy
Device Type Sequential, Random
Access Type Read/Write, Read only
Reclaim Threshold
TSM can reclaim volumes that exceed a reclamation threshold—that is, a percentage of unused space on the volume. This threshold value is set by the TSM administrator, within TSM.
Next Storage Pool
The storage pool that is next in line for backups when the current pool reaches capacity—that is, the destination storage pool for migrated data. TSM automatically requests a storage pool when needed.
Max Scratch
The maximum amount of scratch space allocated to the storage pool. When the number of scratch volumes that TSM is using for the storage pool exceeds the maximum number of scratch volumes specified, the storage pool can run out of space.
Capacity (GB) Storage pool capacity
% Utilized Percentage used
% Migrated Estimated percentage of storage that can be migrated
Low Mig %The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage indicates when the server should stop migrating files to the next available storage pool.
High Mig %The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage indicates when the server should start migrating files to the next available storage pool.
Max Size (MB) The maximum size of the storage pool.
TSM Storage Pools Dashboard 139
TSM Process SummaryThis report is accessed from the TSM Storage Pool Dashboard, by clicking a bar in a Storage Pool Process History graph.
This report provides indicators of the type of job, as well as, the number of files and the relevant tape IDs.
Tape Media Summary
This pie chart shows a summary of all the tapes assigned to this Storage Pool. This pie chart displays both the percentage of tapes grouped by media status, and the number of tapes grouped by media status: • Filling• Full• Pending• Empty
Storage Pool Process History
This historical tracking bar chart displays the summary status of any TSM process that used this Storage Pool. Examples of TSM processes that are plotted on this bar chart are: Storage Pool Backups, Migrations, Expirations, etc. The legend at the bottom of the chart describes the plotted process status values. Click on a bar in this graph to view the TSM Process Summary.
140 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Client Job HistogramTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Job HistogramFrom the Client Job Histogram Report Designer, you can select one of the following options:• Job Throughput Histogram• Job Activity Histogram
These reports provide hour-by-hour data for the previous 24-hour period.Using these reports, you can identify bottlenecks and adjust your environment accordingly.
Job Throughput HistogramThis report provides colored visual cues for quickly determining the backup throughput trends for clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. This report shows completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a completion status of either successful or warning.• Red - Indicates below average throughput—less than 5 MB/second• Yellow - Indicates average throughput—greater than 5 MB/second and less than 9 MB/
second• Blue - Indicates above average throughput—greater than 9 MB/secondNote: The breakdown is based on the average, not the mean throughput.
Client Job Histogram 141
Job Activity HistogramThe Job Activity Histogram lists clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. The colored cells enable you to quickly determine the activity per client.The report shows the number of completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a completion status of: successful, failed, or warning.
142 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 9Chapter 2Media Management Reports
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5This chapter covers the following topics:• Current Media Summary• Tape Media Summary Report
Using Media Management ReportsThe reports in this menu group enable you to manage your backup media inventory. Use the Current Media Summary for an at-a-glance view of the status of the media associated with each of your backup solutions. The pie charts and legends in this report provide drilldown access to the Tape Media Summary report.
Using Media Management Reports 143
Current Media SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Current Media SummaryNote: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.
The Current Media Summary is a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the backup solutions for servers within the scope of the report. The status types vary for each pie chart because they are directly related to the specific backup solution. So, for example, NetBackup reports expired tapes, while NetWorker indicates which tapes can be recycled. Refer to the backup solution’s reference guides for details about media status types.• Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections and a pop-up will display details about
the media of the corresponding status. Similar information is reflected in the chart legend.• Click on any section of the pie chart and/or legend labels to view the Tape Media Summary
report.• Click on the Total Tape Media link to view the Tape Media Summary report.
144 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Tape Media Summary Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Tape Media SummaryYou also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the Total Tape Media link in the Current Media Summary.Note: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.
Depending on your environment, this report listing can get rather long, so you may want to narrow the report’s scope. When you generate the report, you can limit the output using the following parameter choices:• Scope: Select specific servers and/or server groups• Event Status: Select All Media, Media Inside Tape Library, or Media Outside Tape Library• Media Status: All, Expired, Available, In Use, or Full
Sortable Column Headings
When your Tape Media Summary report contains multiple listings, the sortable headings enable you to find the tape media you want quickly. Click on any of the table headings to sort the table by that heading in ascending order. Click the heading a second time to sort in descending order.
Tape Media Details
Each Media ID is a link that will take you to the Tape Media Detail page, which provides comprehensive information about the tape media including, but not limited to, a listing of all backup events associated with the tape media.
Tape Mgmt Server Details
Each Tape Media ID in the report includes a link to its Management Server Detail page.
Capacity Details
• Estimated Capacity - see Tape Media Detail Report• MBytes displays the used capacity• Available (MB)• Percentage Available
Status The tape media status is reported as: Cleaning, Filling, Full, Unavailable, or Vendor Specific (which indicates the disposition specific to the backup product).Note: Place your mouse pointer on top of Vendor Specific to view the message.
Tape Media Summary Report 145
Tape Media Detail ReportThe Tape Media Detail can be accessed from the Tape Media Summary Report by clicking on the Media ID.
Tape Media Location Details
This column of name value pairs indicates the location of the tape media (library name or group of tapes outside the library), the volume group and pool names, and slot number (if inside library). The Library name links to the Media Summary report with all the media in the library listed.
Capacity and Usage Details
The capacity and usage column provides you with the % and MByte total capacity, usage, and available. The MBytes available value is color coded. It will be red if % available is less than 25%, yellow if less than 50%, and green if 50% or more. See Estimated Capacity Notes.
Tape Media Event Details
This column provides you with the date and time of tape media expiration, creation, date assigned, last mount, and last read. The origination time zone for all the date and time values is provided at the bottom of the column.
Sortable Backup Events Listing
At the bottom of the page, a complete listing of every backup that was made to the tape media is provided. Click on any backup ID to view the Backup Event Detail for that event. Click on the server name to view the client server details page.
146 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Tape DetailsYou can access this report from the Tape Media Summary Report by clicking on the Media ID.
Estimated Capacity NotesEvery time tape data is captured, StorageConsole recalculates the estimated tape capacity for the tape media type and volume pool combination. It takes into consideration the written KBs for the media type and volume pool for full tapes and then stores the average as the estimated tape capacity. Initially, when there is not enough data captured, this value may look low compared to the capacity stated by the vendor. Over time, the estimated capacity improves to the actual number of KBs that is being written to the tapes. Note that the amount of data that fits on the tapes differs based on the compression algorithm used and the type of data that is being backed up, which results in different compression ratios.
Tape Media Location Details
This column of name value pairs indicates the location of the tape media (library name or group of tapes outside the library), the volume group and pool names, and slot number (if inside library). The Library name links to the Media Summary Report with all the media in the library listed.
Capacity and Usage Details
The capacity and usage column provides you with the % and MByte total capacity, usage, and available. The MBytes available value is color coded. It will be red if % available is less than 25%, yellow if less than 50%, and green if 50% or more.
Tape Media Event Details
This column provides you with the date and time of tape media expiration, creation, date assigned, last mount, and last read. The origination time zone for all the date and time values is provided at the bottom of the column.
Sortable Backup Events Listing
At the bottom of the page, a complete listing of every backup that was made to the tape media is provided. Click on any backup ID to view the Backup Event Detail for that event. Click on the server name to view the client server details page.
Tape Details 147
For NetBackup, some environments freeze or suspend their media and do not allow their tapes to fill to capacity. In this situation, a StorageConsole database table can be updated to override the standard estimated capacity calculation with values for Volume Pool ID, Media Type, and Estimated Capacity. When values are supplied in this table, the NetBackup estimated capacity calculations will first determine the average size of full tapes—by tape type and volume pool. If this value is less than the value provided in the table, the value in the table will be used for the estimated capacity.Refer to the System Administrator’s Guide for details.
148 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 10Chapter 2Backup SLA Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Available SLA Reports
Backup Start Time Performance• Backup Start Time SLA Report• Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance
Backup Success Performance• Backup Status SLA Report• Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance
Backup Duration Performance• Backup Duration SLA Report• Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance
149
Available SLA Reports Whether you’re an Administrator in an IT department or an Administrator at a Data Center, you commit a specific level of service to your end-users or customers.Use default SLA reports or create custom reports to provide information that determines if you are satisfying the commitments you made to your users or customers. With access to the Reporting Database, you can configure the metrics upon which the reports are based. Service Level Agreements (SLAs) are typically based on the following metrics:• Backup Start Time Performance• Backup Success Performance• Backup Duration Performance
The reports can provide data to fine-tune your SLA and to determine if you’re meeting your commitments. The more detailed your SLAs, the easier it is to cut costs, in the case of an IT department, or provide competitive SLA pricing, in the case of Data Centers.
Refer to the following SLA reports:• Backup Start Time• Backup Status • Backup Duration
150 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Start Time SLA Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Start Time SLAThe Backup Start Time SLA report displays the total number of backups that began within a specific time range of their scheduled start time. Note: This report can be used only for NetBackup, Backup Exec, and TSM start time SLAs.
Use this report to determine what proportion of backups started at their scheduled time, or were delayed and by how long. If jobs are consistently missing their targeted start times, you may need to investigate the feasibility of your current schedule. A delay could be the result of other jobs taking too long or possibly because there are no drives available. To anticipate delays as a result of drive availability, consider using the “Backup Manager Forecasting Reports” on page 175.To determine and improve backup start time performance, see Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance.
Backup Start Time SLA Report 151
Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance Use the Backup Start Time SLA report to gauge your backup efficiency. The Backup Start Time SLA report consists of a bar chart that provides a visual indicator of how long backups take to complete. Backup completion time is measured in days.After you use this chart to identify the backups that represent poor performance, you can drill down to determine the causes so that you can prevent inefficiencies in the future. Your SLA determines what values represent poor performance vs. excellent performance. However, if you don’t currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (31-60 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance.
To determine and improve backup start time performance:
1. Go to the Backup Start Time SLA Report.
2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graph’s y-axis or hold your cursor over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups. Each segment represents 100% of the overall jobs for the day.
Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the Reporting Database were not installed at that time.
3. Identify the poorly performing jobs and the reasons for the poor performance:
a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance as defined by your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. As a general guideline, the Backup Start Time SLA report provides a few metrics:
b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing backup jobs associated with a particular server?
4. Implement solutions to increase backup start time performance, such as:• Reduce the number of tape mounts.• Increase network speed.• Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors with faster processors.• Increase hard drive speed and size.
Metric PerformanceStarted Within 30 minutes ExcellentStarted Within 31-60 minutes GoodStarted Within 61-120 minutes AverageStarted After 120 minutes Poor
Table 10.1 Performance Metrics
152 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Status SLA Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Status SLAUse the Backup Status SLA report to determine backup success performance and to identify backup failures. A typical backup success percentage might be 85%, as indicated by the Successful Backups Goal line shown in the bar chart.
Changing the Success PercentageIf you want to change the success percentage metric, refer to Defining Report Metrics in the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide. To change the percentage, you must have permission to write to the Reporting Database.To determine and improve backup success performance, go to Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance.
Backup Status SLA Report 153
Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance The Backup Status SLA report provides you the ability to drill down into any failed job so that you can identify the cause of the failure. In addition to walking you through this identification process, this procedure provides a checklist to help you improve your backup success performance.
To determine and improve backup success performance:
1. Go to the Backup Status SLA Report.
2. For each day, week, or month, hold your cursor over the triangle icon at the top of each bar to display the success rate. Compare this rate against your SLA.
Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then no backup jobs ran that day.
3. Use the chart to identify any jobs that failed.
4. Identify any trends between failed jobs. For example, are the failed jobs associated with a particular tape drive or disk drive?
154 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Duration SLA Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Duration SLAThe Backup Duration SLA report displays the total number of backups that completed within the specific time range.
As you are generating your Backup Duration SLA report, consider the following best practices:• Use a consistent duration so that you can develop and compare data across the same interval. • Create a duration report for each business unit or for each customer. Depending on how your
company stores data, the Administrator can set up server groups for each business unit • If you have different SLAs with different groups of users or customers, create a unique report
for each SLA so that the data doesn’t become skewed. Even if you have the same SLA for all users or customers, consider generating a unique report so that you can share backup duration performance data that is specific to their jobs.
To determine and improve backup duration performance, go to Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance.
Backup Duration SLA Report 155
Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance Use the Backup Duration SLA report to gauge your backup environment’s efficiency. The Backup Duration SLA report consists of a bar chart. Backup completion time is measured in days.Many backups run for a long time simply because they work with large amounts of data, not because of poor backup duration performance. However, sometimes a job with poor performance might be the result of a faulty tape drive that causes slow write speeds.After you use this Backup Duration SLA chart to identify the backups that represent poor duration performance, you can drill down to determine if there is a problem. Your service level agreement determines what values represent poor performance. However, if you don’t currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (61-120 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance. The Backup Duration SLA report provides the following metrics:
To determine and improve backup duration performance:
1. Go to the Backup Duration SLA Report.
2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graph’s y-axis or hold your cursor over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups.
Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the Reporting Database were not installed at that time.
3. Identify poorly performing jobs:
a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance, as defined by your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. Each segment represents a 100% of the overall jobs for the day.
b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing backup jobs taking place at a particular time?
4. Implement solutions to increase backup performance, such as:• Back up during a less busy time.• Increase network speed.• Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors.
Metric PerformanceCompleted Within 60 minutes ExcellentCompleted Within 61-120 minutes GoodCompleted Within 121-300 minutes AverageCompleted After 301+ minutes Poor
Table 10.2 Performance Metrics
156 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 11Chapter 10Backup Storage Utilization Reports
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5This chapter covers the following topics:• Using Storage Utilization Reports• Disk Usage and Performance Report• Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report• Drive Utilization and Performance Report• Drive Performance Summary Report• TSM Database Utilization• Storage Unit Summary• Storage Unit Detail Report• Storage Unit Event Details• Real Time Library and Drive Status
157
Using Storage Utilization ReportsTo optimize storage utilization and performance, you can:• Identify duplicate backups.• Identify free capacity.• Ensure maximum disk utilization throughput.• Ensure that jobs start on time.• Forecast future storage needs.
A number of practices contribute to storage consumption issues, such as over-provisioning storage and neglecting to deallocate resources. Your data protection strategy should include proactive procedures for reclaiming unused storage. The Portal provides reports to assist you in optimizing storage utilization and performance.
158 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Disk Usage and Performance ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Disk Usage & PerformanceNote: This report is a NetBackup-only report.
1. Storage Unit Details
2. Mgmt Server Details
3. Media Server Details
4. Storage Unit File System Info
5. Real-Time Storage Consumption
6. Backup Volume & Throughput
7. Total Disk Usage
Storage Unit Details
The name of the storage unit.
Mgmt Server Details
Click on the Management Server name link to go to the corresponding Server DetailsReport.
Media Server Details
Click on the Media Server name link to go to the corresponding Server Details page.
Disk Usage and Performance Report 159
Storage Unit File System Info
Each storage unit has an associated pathname that determines where the backups are stored. The report shows both the pathname and the actual file system on which the storage unit resides. If more than one storage unit shares the same file system, the report lists the names of the other storage units.It’s important to know if other storage units share the same file system since any physical free space on the file system will be shared as one common pool by all the storage units for that file system.
Real-Time Storage Consumption
Shows the amount of data on the Storage Unit for the selected report scope, grouped by expiration period.Mouse-over the pie slices to view the total number of backups associated with the amount of allocated storage.Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of allthe active backups that fall within the expiration period and are within the report scope.
Backup Volume & Throughput
Each bar in this graph represents the total number of GBytes written to the Storage Unit for backups jobs that completed during the period represented by the bar.Click on a bar to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of all thebackups represented by the bar.The dotted line plotted against the secondary y-axis represents the Average Throughput of the backups for the period represented by each bar. The calculation only includes those jobs within the current report scope. The throughput is calculated as follows:
backup volume/(sum of all backup durations in seconds)
Total Disk Usage
Each bar in this graph represents the total amount of space in GBytes occupied by unexpired backups.
160 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Tape Library & Drive UtilizationThe Tape Library and Drive Utilization report displays the average drive utilization against the actual drive utilization for any given time period. Often, this report is used to justify VTL purchases.This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
1. Library Utilization
2. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart
3. Pop-up Details
Library Utilization
At the top of each chart, a summary of the library utilization provides a context for the bar chart.
Drillable Stacked Bar Chart
Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked against the actual utilization time. Clicking on any of the bar sections will take you to a Backup Events Report.
Pop-up Details
Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to launch pop-ups of details.
Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report 161
Storage Unit Detail Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit DetailYou also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the File Systems link.Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations DashboardThe Storage Unit Detail report provides a comprehensive view of all tape media in each tape library, groups of tape media outside the libraries, and capacity and usage information for disk storage unit file systems.Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
Tape Library Details
Click on a Library name link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media inside the library.
Mgmt Server Details
Click on a Management Server name link to go to the Server Details page for that server.
Volume Group Media Usage
Displays each library or group of tapes outside the library, and each has its own volume group. The media availability for the volume group is represented by a color coded thermometer so it is easy to tell whether there is a healthy amount of media GBytes available for future backups. Click on any Usage or Free values to go to the Tape Media Summary report for a specific tape library.Each library is accompanied by a media alert thermometer whose color is an indicator of the percentage of GByte availability for all media in the library:
Volume Pool Usage
Displays one or more volume pools, depending on how many exist in the library. Each volume pool has a pie chart that shows the % GBytes Free compared to the % GBytes Used. Click on any part of the pie chart or the Free and Used values to go to the Tape Media Summary report for that tape library.
Green More than 50% available.
Yellow Less than 50% available.
Red Less than 25% available.
162 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Scratch Pool Media Usage
If there is a designated scratch pool for a Tape Library or Group of Tapes Outside the Library, the report display the scratch pool as a feeder pool to the Volume Pools. Each scratch pool is accompanied by a color-coded scratch pool thermometer that indicates the amount of scratch media available. The value represented is a percentage: the capacity of the scratch media compared to the capacity all media in the library.
Volume Pools Fed By Scratch Pool
When there is a designated scratch pool, displays all volume pools in that library that are fed by the scratch pool.
File System Details
Displays details about the disk space of the media server’s file system on which the disk storage units reside. The operating system reports this data. Values of Unknown indicate that the Discovery module is not configured to probe the media servers’ file systems for their physical characteristics.Click on the Management Server name link and the Media Server name link to go to the each server’s respective Server Details page.
File System Usage
Each file system is accompanied by a thermometer that indicates the percentage of space occupied and available on the file system. The operating system reports the Used value, and this value comprises space occupied by all active backup images (Written) as well as any other files that reside on that file system (Other).
Storage Unit Usage
Shows the active backups on the Storage Unit grouped by expiration period. Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Event Details, which displays a list of all the active backups within the particular expiration period.
Storage Unit Detail Report 163
Storage Unit Event DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit DetailThen, in the file system section of the report, click on a pie slice or pie chart legend link.
Backup ID Links to the Job Details Report.
Client Links to the Server Details Report.
Start Time When the backup job started.
Finish Time Links to the Job Details Report.
Expiration Date and time of the tape media expiration.
MBytes Amount of data written to the Storage Unit.
# of Files Number of files written.
Exit Code Status of the backup job.
164 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Drive Utilization and Performance Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Utilization & PerformanceThe Drive Utilization and Performance report enables you to view and compare utilization and performance of the tape drives in your environment. By viewing the total aggregate throughput per drive, you can use this information to help you tune your backup policies.Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an event finish time took place. These calculations are available only for periods of time when an event finished. So, if 20 events finish in one of the bar periods, the calculation is based on the average write speed for the total time for all 20 jobs / total bytes written. Likewise, using this example, Max speed would be the maximum of the averages of all 20 jobs.The Portal does not tie into the hardware directly and monitor the actual drive write speeds. Instead, the reports use the data that the Data Collector retrieved from the backup software—including the amount of data written, job duration time, and job completion time—for each job.
Drive Utilization and Performance Report 165
Drive Details
For each drive, listed at the top of each Drive Utilization and Performance Chart:• Drive Name• Drive Type• Tape Library Name• Backup Management ServerClick on the Backup Management Server name to view its Server Details page.
Pop-up Details
Mouse-over any chart bar or line symbol to view the corresponding values.
Drive Summary
Click on the list at the bottom of each chart to go to the Drive Performance Summary Report, which lists all the backup events that took place on that drive for the time period that you specified in the report scope.Additionally, the min, max, and avg KBytes/Sec for the time period are provided at the bottom of the report.
Avg & Max KBytes/Sec
The Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an event completed.If the report shows a bar with utilization but does not have accompanying line symbols, either no backups or restores completed during that time period or the drive was being utilized for another purpose, such as copying a tape to be vaulted.
Local Start and End Times
Each chart displays the utilization and performance of one drive in the system. The start and end time for each chart is localized to the time zone where that drive’s management server is located.For example, if Drive A’s management server is located in the Pacific Standard Time Zone and Drive B’s management server is located in the Eastern Standard Time Zone (3 hours ahead of Drive A’s management server) and you ran the Drive Utilization and Performance Report for the last 12 hours, the Drive A chart’s start and end times would be 3 hours earlier than the chart for Drive B.This start/end time localization enables real time performance comparison between drives, even if they are located in different parts of the world.
166 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Drive Performance Summary Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Performance SummaryThis report also can be generated via a link in the Drive Utilization and Performance Report.This report provides high-level drive details for the reporting period that you specified in the report scope.Note: If you are accessing this report from the navigation pane, be sure to define a server group scope that is unique by product type—for example, only NetBackup servers. Also, this report does not display Symantec Backup Exec information.
Drive Name Links to the Drive Performance Detail.
Drive # Lists the drive number.
Drive Type The drive type label.
Drive Status The current status of the drive.
Library Name The name of the library.
Controlling Server Links to the controlling servers details in a Server Details Report.
Total MBytes Total MBytes used. A total for all drives is shown at the bottom of this column.
# of Backups The number of backups that used this drive.
Min MBytes/Sec These three values provide indicators of the drive’s perfor-mance. The Maximum rate represents the fastest speed that a job ran during the selected time frame. Likewise, the Minimum rate represents the slowest speed that a job ran during the same time frame. For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.
Max MBytes/Sec
Avg MBytes/Sec
Drive Performance Summary Report 167
As an alternative to Server Group scope, you can select Tape Libraries as the scope:
1. In the Drive Performance Summary Report Designer window, click Modify to change the scope.
2. In the Client Selection window, first click Clear All to remove the server groups from the “In scope” window.
168 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
3. Click the Tape Library tab to display the list of possible tape libraries in your environment.
4. Double-click the tape libraries to include them in the scope and then click OK.
NetBackup Drive Performance SummaryFor NetBackup jobs, the drive performance algorithm takes into account the use of multiple tapes, as some backups require the dismounting and re-mounting of several tapes. The Kilobytes/second rate is calculated for each piece of tape media used by the backup job.mediaKilobytes / ((finishReadWrite - startReadWrite) * SECS_IN_A_DAY * (mediaKilobytes/jobKilobytes))
Where:• mediaKilobytes is the total kilobytes written to an individual piece of tape media• jobKilobytes is the total size of the backup job, as reported by bpdbjobs• startReadWrite is the date/time that the job started writing to the tape• finishReadWrite is the date/time that the job finished writing to the tape
The Drive Performance Summary report displays the minimum, average, and maximum overall drive performance for all jobs for the reporting period. When you drill down to an individual tape drive, the Drive Performance Detail Report uses this same algorithm to display the performance of each job. If there are multiple rows for a single job, such as when multiple tapes are used by the job, the performance metric is averaged across all the rows returned from the above algorithm. The details from which drive performance is derived can be viewed via drilldown links. In the Drive Performance Detail report, click on the Finish Date for one of the backup jobs to view the Job Details. At the bottom of the Job Details Report, the backup attempts (try records) are displayed.
Drive Performance Summary Report 169
Drive Performance DetailThis report is the result of a drilldown from the Drive Performance Summary Report.
For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.
Drive Name The drive name—this was the link to this report from the Drive Performance Summary report.
Library Name The library name links to the Tape Media Summary report.
Client Links to the client’s Server Details Report.
Start Time When the backup job started.
Finish Time Links to the Job Details Report.
Duration Duration of the job.
Status Status of the job.
# of Files The number of files backed up to this drive.
MBytes Amount of data backed up to this drive.
MBytes/Sec
Note: For NetBackup, this value is calculated using the job write start time and job write end time (not the job start time and job finish time). For example, a job can start, but then it can wait in a queue before the job begins to write to a tape/disk. That queue time is eliminated in this calculation.
170 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
TSM Database Utilization To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > TSM Database UtilizationThe TSM Database Utilization report provides usage and capacity trending of the TSM database. Using this report, you can determine how much of the allocated database space has been used over the selected report period.
1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart
2. Pop-up Details
3. Usage & Availability Trending
Drillable Stacked Bar Chart
Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked against the actual amount of utilization time. Click on any bar section will to view the Backup Events Report.
Pop-up Details
Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to display pop-ups including the details of that particular bar section.
Usage & Availability Trending
Shows how much of the allocated database space has been utilized within the TSM database over the time period that you specified in the report scope.
TSM Database Utilization 171
Storage Unit SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit SummaryThis report is NetBackup-specific.
Library Details Click on the library name or server to view the Storage Unit Detail Report.
File System Details Click on the server name to view the Server Details Report.
172 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Real Time Library and Drive StatusTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Real Time Library and Drive StatusUse this report to monitor the health of each library. This report displays current high-level information for each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s).Note: Only NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your server group scope selection.
Library Library name.Type The type of library, such as Optical or HCART.Management Server
Click this link to view server details.
Slots The number of slots in the library.Drives The number of drives in the library.In Use Number of drives currently in use.Drives Available
Drives - In Use = Drives Available
Down The number of disabled drives. When this number becomes equal to or greater than 25% of the library’s drives, the library’s row of information will be highlighted in red.
Avail % The percentage of drives in this library that are available.
Real Time Library and Drive Status 173
174 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
12Chapter 10Backup Manager Forecasting Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Forecasting Overview• Media Forecasting Dashboard• Media Availability Forecast• Media Consumption Forecast• Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report• Scratch Pool Forecast Report
Forecasting OverviewTo ensure accurate forecasts, the reports make the following decisions:• In order to provide a good statistical sample, when you select a display range, the report uses
historical data that is twice that display range.• If the full range of historical data is unavailable, the data that is available is used. For
example, if you want to view data for January of the previous year to December of the current year, the Portal looks for four years worth of historical data.
• Although the report forecasts the current period, the report ignores the current period when it derives statistical calculations. For example, if the current month is July and you request to view the report by months, the bar for July of this year will be forecasted and data for July of this year will be ignored for statistical calculations.
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5
Forecasting Overview 175
Media Forecasting Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Forecasting DashboardThe Media Forecasting Dashboard displays 14 Days of historical consumption and 7 days of forecasted consumption. This report is NetBackup-specific. Using this dashboard, you can pro-actively manage tape availability.
Media Consumption Forecast
Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.The dark blue bars indicate historical consumption while the light blue bars indicate consumption predicted for the next 7 days.In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week consumption data for the historical period that you specified in the report scope. In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following algorithm:
1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group.
2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.
Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope. The chart displays the aggregate tape consumption results using the circular line symbols.
176 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.
Drillable Bars Click on any historical consumption bar to drill down to the Media Usage Detail Report for that day.
Media Availability Forecast
The Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted availability.Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.
In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following algorithm:
1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group.
2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.
Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope. The system calculates the forecasted availability for the close of each day using the following algorithm: previous day’s availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption
Media Availability Alerts
The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day that the report displays. If the number of tapes available drops below the Availability Threshold, the symbol is red. The default for the Availability Threshold is 25, but you can configure this value for each portal instance.
Media Expiration By Tapes & GBytes
Media Expiration is displayed on a by-Tape and by-GByte basis in the first two pie charts.
Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.Mouse-over any pie slice to display pop-ups that provide display the data associated with that slice.Click on any of the pie slices or associated legend items to go to the Media Summary report, which shows all the media that expires within the associated time frame. Each piece of media is associated with the slot # as well as the expiration date so that you can easily select and remove media from the library. Each of the Expiration Time Frame Policies defaults to the following:Expire <= 7 DaysExpire <= 30 DaysExpire <= 90 DaysExpire <= 180 DaysExpire > 180 DaysThe Expiration Time Frame Policies are globally configurable parameters for each portal instance.
Media Forecasting Dashboard 177
Real Time Media Status
The pie chart provides a real-time snapshot of all the media that the servers within the report scope are using.
Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.• Mouse-over any of the pie chart sections to display pop-ups with pertinent details
about the media of the corresponding status.• Click on any section of the pie chart to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all
media with the corresponding status.• Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all
the servers within the report scope. Scratch & Volume Pools By Media Type
A row for each type of media in each pool (media type/pool instance) within the report scope displays in the Volume Pool Usage Forecast.This report limits the total # of instances to eight. Click on the Total Volume Pools link located at the top right of the component to view a complete report which will include all the media type/pool instances within the report scope.If a scratch pool exists within the report scope, the report displays the scratch pool at the top of the report.If the forecasted consumption for any media type/pool instance exceeds the forecasted availability after the future time period that you selected in the report scope, the row instance is red.
178 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Media Availability ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Availability ForecastThe Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted availability. This report is NetBackup-specific.The system calculates the forecasted consumption by the close of each day, using the following algorithm: (previous day’s availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption)In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the system averages day-of-the-week consumption data for a historical period specified in the “Historical Data Period” parameter on the Media Forecasting Dashboard Report Designer.When forecasting the number of tapes consumed on each day, the system tallies the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. The system then divides the total GByte consumption for that volume group / media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is repeated for each volume group / media type instance within the scope of the report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in the bar chart.The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day displayed on the chart. Place your mouse over each colored portion of a bar to see the following details for the associated time period:• Currently Available Storage Media• Current Consumption• Forecasted Consumption• Forecasted Available• Forecasted Tape Availability (mouse over connected circles at the top of the bars)
Media Availability Forecast 179
Media Consumption ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning >Media Consumption ForecastThis report is NetBackup-specific.A bar chart represents historical tape usage, with a projection of future needs. You can select report periods ranging from one week to eight weeks of data. In addition, you can narrow the report scope by choosing specific server groups or even clients within a server group.In order to forecast the seven days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week consumption data for a historical period specified in the Time Period.In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed on each day, the report tallies the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. Then the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type is divided by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is repeated for each volume group/media type instance within the scope of the report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in the bar chart.Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.
180 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Media Usage DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Consumption ForecastThen, click on a Media Consumed bar in the bar chart.
Client Click this link to view the Server Details Report.
Backup ID Click this link to launch the Job Details Report.
Mgmt Server The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to view the Server Details Report.
Volume Pool The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.
Finish Time Click on this link to launch the Job Details Report.
Weekday The day of the week on which the backup occurred.
Total Written Total amount written to the media.
Total Files Total number of files written to the media.
Estimated Tapes Forecasted tape need for the backup job.
Tape ID Click on these links to launch the Tape Media Detail Report.
Media Usage Details 181
Tape Drive Usage and Forecast ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Tape Drive Usage & ForecastThis report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.Use this report to determine if and when you need to add more tape drives to your libraries. When you customize this report, if you enter a date range in the past, the report will include historical usage information. If your date range includes a finish date beyond the current day, the report will include forecast estimates.Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.Tip: When entering the date range in the Report Designer, use a finish date that is a few weeks or months into the future. This will ensure that a sufficient forecast is produced. Also, to produce a realistic forecast, group the data by Weeks, Months, or Quarters. For this type of report, the time units of Hours and Days are too small to provide meaningful charts.
The report derives the forecast by comparing usage with your existing tape inventory. To be safe, use the highest forecast when determining how many tape drives you need to add.For additional information about the tape drives in your environment, use the Tape Library and Drive Utilization report.The Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:
# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope that you specified.
Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each color of a bar to retrieve the following information:• Average tape drives used previously• Maximum tape drives used previously• Average tape drives forecasted• Maximum tape drives forecasted
182 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Scratch Pool Forecast ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Scratch Pool ForecastThis report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.A scratch pool is a repository of media that is available to backup servers. There are a few things that affect the availability of media in a scratch pool:• If your backup servers run out of media, they automatically take and use media from the
scratch pool. • If your backup servers delete data, making media available, they automatically add the
recycled media to the scratch pool. • When you clean tapes or expire tapes, you temporarily or permanently affect the pool of
media.Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.
Because backup success is tied directly to scratch pools, it’s important that you monitor and forecast media usage in the scratch pools.
The Scratch Tape Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:
# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope that you specified.
Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each bar to retrieve the following information:• Average scratch tapes used previously• Maximum scratch tape used previously• Average scratch tapes forecasted• Maximum scratch tapes forecasted
Scratch Pool Forecast Report 183
184 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 13Chapter 10Backup Billing and Usage Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Available Billing and Usage Reports• Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy• Determining Media Chargebacks• Determining Backup Chargebacks
Available Billing and Usage Reports The Billing and Usage reports can be used to determine which business units are using your resources. In addition, you can use these reports to calculate chargeback costs.If you’re in the process of rolling out chargeback policies, consider using these reports as planning tools—to see what impact your policies might have on your business units or customers.However, you need not charge your business units in order to find the Billing and Usage Reports useful. You simply can use the reports to gauge which business units are consuming the majority of your resources.The following Billing and Usage reports are provided:• Billing and Chargeback Summary• Server Consumption Summary
Available Billing and Usage Reports 185
Creating a Billing and Chargeback PolicyThis procedure assumes that your server group hierarchy represents the logical relationships—business units, customers, etc.—on which you want to report.When you set the per-GB and per-tape usage costs, you do so at the server group level. Therefore, child server group policies take precedence over parent groups. If a parent server group (Group A) has a billing and usage policy set at $0.50/Gbyte and $35.00/Tape and a child server group (Group B) has a usage policy set at $0.55/Gbyte and $40.00/Tape, the servers contained in Group B would be billed at $0.55/Gbyte and $40.00/Tape rather than the billing rate of the parent group.When StorageConsole discovers that there is no policy set for any given group, it traverses the server group hierarchy looking for a policy in a parent group until it finds a billing and usage policy to use. If the application cannot find any policy as it searches up the server group hierarchy, a value of $0.00 will be assigned for both per-GB and per-tape usage.
To add a new billing policy for a server group:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Admin > Billing and Usage Policies.
The Billing and Chargeback Administration window appears.2. Click Add.
The Billing and Chargeback Policy Administration window appears.3. Select a Server Group name to which the policy will apply.
Note that a policy set at any particular server group will be assumed by all child server groups that do not have a policy.
4. Enter values for Cost Per GByte, Cost Per Tape, and Cost per Duplicated GB and then click OK.
Cost Per GByte
The amount each server within the server group should be billed per GB of disk space consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.
Cost Per Tape
The amount each server within the server group should be billed per tape drive consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.
Cost Per Dup’d GB
The amount each server within the server group should be billed per duplicated consumption. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.
186 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Determining Media Chargebacks
The Billing and Chargeback Summary report provides a line item of each client’s tape consumption. The Billing Summary Report calculates the chargeback based on billing and usage policies as outlined in Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy.The report displays data based on the servers. This procedure assumes that you know which business units own specific servers.There are a couple of limitations to the billing and chargeback reports:• The report does not consider shared tape usage. If Client A wrote to tapes 1, 2 and 3, the
report shows charges for the client for those three tapes. If Client B also wrote to tapes 1 and 2, the report lists charges for that client for those two tapes. Therefore, if both Client A and Client B belong to the same business unit, they are billed twice for two of the three tapes.
• The report always uses the current cost of a tape. If the cost changes and you generate a new report, the report reflects the new cost. However, if you run an old report from a year ago, it would also pick up the new cost and therefore not be the same as the original report. Therefore, before you change the unit cost, generate and export previous reports for comparison.
To determine chargebacks for a business unit or customer:
1. Go to the Billing and Chargeback Summary report.
Each client server row contains subtotals for GB and tape consumption.2. To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of the Billing and
Chargeback Summary report.
3. Check the value in the Total Cost field, which appears at the right of the table. This value is the total charge to the business unit or customer.
4. If you want to itemize your chargebacks for your business unit/customer, consider the individual costs that comprise the total.
If you feel that the chargebacks are not accurate, do the following:• Verify that the billing and chargeback policies are accurate. Go to Creating a Billing and
Chargeback Policy.• Ensure that the server group does not contain clients that belong to another business unit or
customer.
Determining Media Chargebacks 187
Determining Backup ChargebacksThe Server Consumption Summary report displays backup consumption and the number of backup files captured for all servers that you specify. The report includes backups that were successful and those that have warnings. It does not include failed backups.
To determine server consumption chargebacks:
1. Go to the Server Consumption Summary report.
Servers that do not have any consumption or backups for the period that you specified, do not appear in the report.
2. Drill down into the clients, management servers, or backups to get more detail.
3. If you have an ERP system, export the data to your ERP software. Go to Exporting Reports.
188 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Billing and Chargeback SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Billing & Chargeback SummaryTip: To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of this report.
The usage and billing details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers.
Note: If the scope of this report is for NetBackup-only server groups, three additional columns will be included: Total Dup (GB), Cost Per Dup’d GB, and Dup’d Usage Cost GB, which are set in the Billing and Usage Policies.
To view or modify billing and chargeback items, go to Admin > Billing and Usage Policies.
Client Server The External Name. Click this link to access Server Details.Business Unit/Department
The full pathname of the server group.
Billing and Chargeback Summary 189
Backed UpThe amount of storage consumed by the client server during the specified time period.Click this link to view a Job Summary report.
Cost Per GB Amount the client is charged per GB of consumption.GB Usage Cost Backed Up * Cost per GB = GB Usage Cost
# of TapesThe # of tapes consumed by the client during the specified time period.Click this link to view a Job Summary report.
Cost Per Tape Amount the client is charged per tape consumed.Total Tape Cost # of Tapes * Cost per Tape = Total Tape CostTotal Dup (GB) Total duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope)
Cost per Dup’d GB The charge that has been configured for duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope)
Dup’d Usage Cost Total Dup * Cost per Dup’d = Dup’d Usage Cost(NetBackup-only scope)
Total Cost GB Usage Cost + Total Tape Cost = Total Cost
190 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Server Consumption SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Server Consumption SummaryThe consumption details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers. If you are in a large enterprise, this table can get unwieldy, so consider modifying the scope to filter the data by server group. By default, the report lists clients in descending consumption order, with the heaviest consumer at the top. The following algorithm determines total consumption:total disk backup + total tape backup = total consumptionTip: Sort the data by Tape Backup or Disk Backup to identify heaviest storage device consumers.
The fields are self-explanatory, so they are not described in this section.Use the following links to access additional details:Link Report GeneratedClient Server Details ReportServer Server Details ReportLast Backup Job Details ReportDisk Backup Job Summary ReportTape Backup Job Summary Report
Server Consumption Summary 191
192 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 14Chapter 10Backup Policies Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• NetBackup Policy• TSM Policy Domains• NetWorker Groups• Backup Specification Summary
NetBackup PolicyTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup PoliciesThis report provides the details of the underlying NetBackup Policies that have been defined for your environment.
Management Server The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to view the Server Details Report.
Policy Name Name assigned to this policy. Click this link to access the Backup Policy Details report.
Type Indicates the specific components it is managing—for exam-ple, MS-SQL server, Oracle, NDMP, MS-Windows.
Storage Unit The name of the storage unit.
Volume Pool The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.
NetBackup Policy 193
Backup Policy DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup PoliciesThen, click on the Policy Name.The Policy Details include not only a list of clients covered by the policy, but also the scheduling details. Often the list of clients is long, so you’ll need to scroll to the bottom of the report to see the scheduling details.
# of Clients # of clients being backed up.
Status The backup status code returned by NetBackup.
194 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Policy Details This section includes details that are found in the NetBackup Policy page. In addition, the following Yes/No indicators reflect the current policy set-tings:• Follow NFS Mount Points • Cross Mount Point • Client Encryption • Client Compress • Priority • Keyword• Max Jobs Per Policy• Multiple Streams
Client Details • Client - The Client name.• Last Backup - Date of the last backup job.• Backups this Month - Number of backup jobs for the current month.• Written this Month - Amount of data backed up for the current month.• Management Server - The Server responsible for backups.• Product Type - Backup solution product name.• Make/Model & OS - Client’s details, if known.
NetBackup Policy 195
TSM Policy DomainsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy DomainsThis report is specific to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager.
Instance Name The policy instance.
Domain Name A backup group of file systems and drives. Click this link to access the Policy Domain Details.
Description The domain’s description.
Activated Management Class
A management class is a policy object that users can bind to each file to specify how the server manages the file. The man-agement class can contain a backup copy group, an archive copy group, and space management attributes. A copy group determines how the TSM server manages backup versions or archived copies of the file. The space management attributes determine whether the file is eligible for migration by the space manager client to server storage, and under what conditions the file will be migrated.
Backup Retention Days
If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were associ-ated with it need to rebind to another management class. TSM will keep the backup files for a specified number of days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate manage-ment class. After this period, the files will no longer be retained. Retention details are defined in the TSM copy group and default retention grace periods for the domain.
Archive Retention Days
If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were associ-ated with it need to rebind to another management class. TSM will keep the archived files for a specified number of days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate manage-ment class. After this period, the files will no longer be retained.
Number of Nodes The number of file servers registered with the TSM server.
Active When the instance became active.
196 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Policy Domain DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy DomainsThen, click on a Domain Name.
A Policy Set is an object that contains a group of management class definitions that exist for a policy domain. Several policy sets can exist within a policy domain, but only one policy set can be active at a time.
TSM Policy Domains 197
NetWorker GroupsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker GroupsEMC NetWorker provides a Group resource to automate backups on a group-by-group basis. By setting up groups, you can manage the load on backup servers.
Server The EMC NetWorker server that is managing the backups for the associated group. Click on this link to access server details.
Group Name A group of clients to be backed up. Click this name to view the list of client instances in the Group Detail report.
Start Time If Autostart is Enabled, the group will begin being backed up at this time.
Interval The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups.
Autostart
This attribute indicates if the group will be backed up automati-cally for each time period specified as the interval. Values include:E = Enabled, which means clients will be backed up automati-cally at the time specified in Start Time.D = DisabledS = Start now, which means that clients are backed up immedi-ately, overriding the start time.
Schedule Override NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart.
Status
Backup Status for the group can be one of the following:• Running• Idle• Finished• Not Finished (backup exited without completing)• Preview Run (test a backup configuration)
198 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Group DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker GroupsThen, click on a Group Name.A NetWorker Group provides the mechanism for establishing which clients will be backed up together and then scheduled for their backups. This report displays the NetWorker Group Control details.
The following NetWorker-specific details are provided in this report.
Group Name A group of clients to be backed up.
Schedule Override NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart.
Start Time When the group backup is scheduled to begin.
Override LevelOverride levels can be configured for a specific date in a Net-Worker backup schedule, enabling you to override the backup level setting for every client in that group.
Auto-Start When enabled, this attribute triggers regularly scheduled back-ups.
Interval The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups.
Status
Backup Status for the group can be one of the following:• Running• Never Run• Finished• Not Finished (backup exited without completing)• Preview Run (test a backup configuration)
NetWorker Groups 199
Force Incremental
When this field is set to Yes, if two full backups start within a 24-hour period, NetWorker forces the second one to be an incremental backup. (for an interval attribute of less than 24 hours)
Last Start/End The last time the group started/ended a save operation.
Duration Duration of the last group save.
Clones & Clone Pool
NetWorker uses a cloning process to make copies of saved data. In addition to copying the data, NetWorker keeps track of the details of the cloning operation in a client file index and in the media database. When the Clones attribute is set to Yes, Net-Worker automatically clones a save set whenever it is backed up. The Clone Pool indicates where the clones are sent.
Auto Restart This restart attribute indicates if a group should be automati-cally restarted after an incomplete save operation.
Success Threshold Indicates the success or failure of the groups save set opera-tions.
Client Retries
You can configure NetWorker to be persistent in cases where a client may be hung. Based on the Client Retries value, Net-Worker will make multiple attempts at backing up a client before it moves on to other clients.
Inactivity Time-out The inactivity (in minutes) before NetWorker determines that the client is hung.
Save Group Parallelism
The NetWorker server can perform simultaneous backups in either of the following ways:• multiple save sets from multiple clients• multiple save sets from a single client.
Client Instance Name Click on this link to access the Client Instance Detail report.
Last Successful Backup
Click on this link to access the Job Details Report.
200 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Client Instance DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker GroupsThen, click on a Group Name and then click on a Client Instance Name.
NetWorker Groups 201
Backup Specification SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HPD Backup SpecificationThe HP Data Protector Backup Specification report lists the Backup Specification, with the objects that are backed up, the servers and the next time the backup will be performed. Note that the objects can be entire disks or volumes, or sub-sets of these, such as directories or the Windows Registry.
Specification Links to the Backup Specification DetailServer Backup serverObject Type The type of data for which the backup specification is config-
ured—database entity or a disk image (raw disk)—for example, filesystem.
# of Clients Number of clients backed up by this backup specificationNext Backup Mode Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr
8, Incr 9Next Backup Date Date and time of the next backup
202 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Backup Specification DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HPD Backup SpecificationThen, click on a Specification link.The HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail report lists the details of the specification, such as mount points and clients. Each of the media must be in a media pool.
Specification Specification NameObject Type The type of data for which the backup specification is config-
ured—database entity or a disk image (raw disk)—for example, filesystem.
# of Clients Number of clients backed up by this backup specificationNext Backup Mode Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr
8, Incr 9Next Backup Date Date and time stamp of the next backup
Backup Specification Summary 203
204 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 15Chapter 10Restoring Files and Folders
This chapter covers the following topics:• Restoring Backup Files and Folders• Monitoring Progress of Restore
Restoring Backup Files and Folders The Restore Wizard enables you to restore specific files or folders. To prevent overwriting of original data contained in the files or folders, the Restore Wizard will not allow you to restore files to their original locations.
To define a folder or file for a restore:
BeforeYou
Begin
Disable pop-up blocking software.
1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > Create Restore Job.
2. Type your User ID and restore password.
The Restore window appears.3. Locate the file or folders that you want to restore using the following parameters:
Enter Server Name
Specifies the name of the server that originally contained the file you wish to restore. Enter a name and click Check. The Portal searches for the server and when found, returns its IP address.
Search for Backups Made
Searches for backups within a specific time period for the selected server. Select a timeframe from the drop-down list.
Enter File or Folder Name
Note: Searching for files works only if the client had file level detail enabled. File level details can be enabled only for NetBackup and Legato.Specify the full name of a specific file or folder. Supply the absolute path of the file/folder and the file/folder name. For example: In UNIX: /export/home/jcollins/apt/design.docIn Windows: C:\marketing\collateral\data_sheet.doc
Click Search to look for the file/folder on the backup server.Note: Wildcard searches are supported with the following methods:• Type at least the first 3 characters of the file/folder.• Type the first 3 characters of the file/folder followed by an asterisk
(xyz*).
Restoring Backup Files and Folders 205
4. Click on the specific folder or file to select it for the restore process.
5. Specify the directory where the Restore Wizard should save the file or folder.
6. Click Restore, then confirm the restore operation.NextStep
Monitor the status of the restore. Go to Monitoring Progress of Restore.
Monitoring Progress of Restore After you initiate a restore of a file or folder, you can monitor the progress of the restore.
To monitor progress of restore:
1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > Manage Restore Jobs.
The window displays the current restore jobs and their associated status:
2. (Optional) Click on Date Submitted to view the Restore Job’s Detail Report.
Date Submitted
Date and Time the restore job was submitted. Drill down to the Restore Jobs Detail Report
Requestor User Name of the individual requesting the restore jobServer Name
The server of the restore job.
File / Folder File or folder to be restored.Status Completion status of the restore process.Action The Delete button provides the ability to delete a submitted restore job.
206 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 16Chapter 10Capacity Manager Reports
Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, over-consumption, and under-utilized storage. These reports provide end-to-end storage capacity reporting: both a host-to-array view and an array-to-host view.This chapter covers the following topics:• Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process• Overview of Capacity Manager Reports• Why Capacity Manager?• Capacity Manager Reports• Capacity Manager Quick-Start List• Application Capacity & Utilization• Array Capacity and Utilization• List Array Groups• Host Capacity & Utilization• Host Utilization Detail• LUN Utilization Summary• Array Group Details• Array Port Utilization• Array Capacity Forecast• Host Capacity Forecast• Applications At Risk• Over-Provisioned Applications• Application Storage Dashboard• Available/Reclaimable Storage• Capacity Chargeback and Billing• LUNs At Risk• Over-Provisioned LUNs• Hosts at Risk• Over-Provisioned Hosts
In addition, a set of NetApp-specific reports comes packaged with Capacity Manager. These reports are described in NetApp Capacity Reports. A set of reports, specific to the IBM 6000 & 8000 Series, is also available, described in IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.For an overview of how Capacity Manager works, see the Getting Started Guide for Administrators.
207
Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning ProcessThe following example of the provisioning process provides insight into how storage can disappear from an enterprise radar screen, causing inefficient use of existing storage and ineffective planning for future requirements.
1. A department requests storage from the provisioning team.
Often the request for storage occurs months before a project’s servers go online. And, often the request exceeds the true need.
2. The provisioning team sets up a LUN and assigns it to a host.
The LUN is not yet available for mounting file systems on the host.3. The storage allocation ticket is handed off to the group that will manage the host.
Often the storage requestor is not the owner of the host.4. The system administrator must perform a LUN scan or a system re-boot in order for the
host to be able to see the LUN. Often, this is the step that doesn’t get done.
208 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Overview of Capacity Manager ReportsCapacity Manager reports provide insight into the variance between allocated and used storage, along with predictive analysis of future needs. See also, Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process.
Why Capacity Manager?
Drive efficient utilization of network storage• Reclaim unused storage• Reduce annual storage management costs• Defer, reduce, or cancel storage acquisitions• Track storage utilization automatically, instead of manually updating spreadsheets that are
out-of-date each day
Access application-centric metrics• Metrics provide insight into not only host and storage array usage, but also application usage• Applications use storage, not hosts
Capacity Manager ReportsThe following table provides a summary of the Capacity Manager reports that can be accessed from the Menu Groups at the left of the Portal window. Each report is described in detail in subsequent sections. In addition, a recommended get-acquainted report sequence is provided in the Capacity Manager Quick-Start List.
Menu Groups & Reports Descriptions
Storage Capacity & Utilization
Array Capacity and Utilization Overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are under-utilized. Drill down to the List Array Groups page to view details about each of the array groups associated with a storage array.
Host Capacity & Utilization Overview of host utilization. Drill down to details in the Host Utilization Detail.Without these reports, you would need to access each host to gather the details.
LUN Utilization Summary If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their size or reassign them altogether. View all the LUN mapping details, such as mount points and file systems. Drill down to the Array Group Details to view all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array group. This report can be filtered to display the following subsets of LUN data:• Allocated, but unused • Allocated, but undiscovered • Unallocated
Overview of Capacity Manager Reports 209
Array Port Utilization Lists the physical/logical port connections between the host’s HBA and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.
NetApp Aggregate Summary Summary of how physical aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and plexes. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp Volume Summary Summary of the logical volume with links to the associated QTree, LUN, and Snapshot details. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp NFS Summary Lists the volumes that are exported via NFS. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp CIFS Summary Lists the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts via CIFS shares. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
QTree Summary Summary of the quota management configurations. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp Snapshot Summary Lists snapshot details for the time report’s time interval. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp Disk Summary Lists the disk within a storage system. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
IBM Array Site Summary Lists IBM Array Sites with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Array Summary Summary of Array capacity with drilldowns to Array, Array Site, and Rank capacity details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Rank Summary Summary of IBM Ranks with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Extent Pool Summary Summary of IBM Extent Pools with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Disk Summary Summary of the physical disks with associated array and array site information. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary
Summary of the Dynamic Provision Pool capacity details. See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.
Hitachi Disk Summary See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.
Storage Capacity & Forecast
Array Capacity Forecast Project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:• Historical date range• Forecast horizon (date range)• Storage Array Group• Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity
210 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Host Capacity Forecast At-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage—from the host’s perspective. You can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.
Available or Reclaimable Storage
Array Utilization Summary Displays a summary listing of each array’s capacity and usage.
Allocated but Unused LUNs All the necessary LUN configuration steps have been completed to make this storage available, but it still remains unused. The LUNs have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with the LUN storage paths.
Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs These LUNs have storage paths, but have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with those storage paths.
Unallocated LUNs Lists LUNs that are not allocated to any hosts. These LUNs have no storage paths.
Suspected De-provisioned Hosts Storage often is allocated from a storage array and provisioned to a host, but when that host is re-assigned or de-provisioned, the storage remains unused. This report list hosts that are candidates for re-assignment.
Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes This report lists logical volumes created from disks or volume groups, but no file systems have been create on these logical volumes.
Unused Disks/Volume Groups This report provides insight into wasted space on hosts. It displays the total volume group and disk capacity, along with used and available capacity.
Application Capacity & Utilization
Applications At Risk Identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space.
Over-Provisioned Applications Identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storage—resulting in wasted storage.
Application Storage Dashboard This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. The table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage. Expand a listed application to see sub-components.
Chargeback and Billing
Utilization By Host View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by host.
Utilization By Storage Tier View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by storage tier.
Utilization By Server Groups View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by server groups.
Capacity At Risk
LUNs At Risk LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.
Overview of Capacity Manager Reports 211
Over-Provisioned LUNs Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space. Use this report to find wasted space—at the file system or mount point level. LUNs that appear on this list have storage allocated to hosts that are not fully utilizing that storage. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the specified threshold.
Hosts at Risk This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars. Select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, Critical.
Over-Provisioned Hosts Determine which hosts are over-provisioned. Reclaim the space before committing resources to acquire additional storage.
NetApp Aggregates at Risk For thin provisioning, this report lists host usage that is about to exceed the storage that was promised.
NetApp Volumes at Risk Lists thin-provisioned volumes that may be at risk of over-commitment.
212 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Capacity Manager Quick-Start ListUse the following sequence of selected reports to become acquainted with the details that support your capacity management process. This quick-start list provides a brief preview of the capacity optimization that can be achieved using Capacity Manager.Note: Keep in mind that in an enterprise, multiple teams have various responsibilities in the storage provisioning process—providing ample opportunities for storage to drop out of sight.
Capacity Manager Reports Focus your attention on:1. LUN Utilization Summary • Generate this report by selecting one or more storage
arrays. Then, expand/contract a row to view the mount point details. See LUN Utilization Summary.
• Then, generate this report again and in the Report Designer window, select the LUN status of: Allocated but undiscovered. Note that in this version of the report, mount point details are missing because the storage has been allocated, but has not yet been discovered and therefore it cannot be used by an application. This same report is available as: Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs.
2. Host Capacity & Utilization • Without this report, an administrator would have to touch every host to gather information. This report, along with the Host Utilization Detail report, replaces manually created spreadsheets for tracking host usage.
• Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report.3. Host Utilization Detail • Access this report from a host link in the Host Capacity &
Utilization report.• Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to
identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details highlight inefficient use of storage.
• Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks.
4. Over-Provisioned LUNs • Use this report to identify LUNs that have been allocated, but the storage is not being used by the host.
• Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report.5. Array Capacity and Utilization • Focus on the two columns at the right of this report—
RAID Group Capacity and LUN Capacity— and their corresponding usage thermometers. If you have NetApp storage, view Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View).
6. Applications At Risk • Identify which applications are expected to exceed storage capacity and when.
Overview of Capacity Manager Reports 213
Array Capacity and UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationUse this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.Several versions of this report display data relevant to the type of storage:• NetApp - Because NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructs—such as
Aggregates and Volumes—to organize and access its storage, additional NetApp-specific data is available via this report. For information about the NetApp-specific version of this report, see Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View).
• HDS Dynamic Provisioning - View details related to Dynamic Provisioning Pools via the Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View).
• IBM Arrays - View array details, including Extent Pool, Array Site, and Rank capacity via the Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View).
• Other Storage Arrays - The information from all other storage array types is displayed in the format shown below.
The report is organized into four columns:
1. Array Summary
2. Raw Capacity - Raw capacity is the summation of the physical disks. Usable space is the space that is calculated from RAID groups and LUNs.
214 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
3. RAID Group Capacity or Aggregate/Volume Capacity (for NetApp storage)
4. LUN Capacity
Array Summary
The array information can be used to reference the array vendor’s capacity limits.
Array Name
The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide. From here you can drill down to the array.
Family The family classification of the storage array as assigned by the vendor. Use this name to ascertain the vendor’s product specifications.
Type The specific model of the storage array.
Vendor The name of the vendor that distributes the storage array.
ProductThe name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array.
# Hosts
This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected. Click on the Hosts link to go to the Host Capacity & Utilization.
# Ports The number of ports in the array. Click on this link to view the Array Port Utilization.
Host Usage Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
Array Capacity and Utilization 215
Raw Capacity
This column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.NOTE: When calculating capacity, Capacity Manager makes requests to the Device Manager for physical devices (PDEVs) for all Array Groups in a storage array.
Capacity
For EMC Symmetrix arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks from all array groups—no spares. Note: When viewing raw capacity in EMC Control Center, disk group 0 (hot spares) is not included in the total capacity calculation—accounting for the difference between the EMC and Capacity Manager reported capacity values.For EMC CLARiiON arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks from all array groups—including spares (drives that are not allocated to an array group)For HDS arrays: Sum of capacity of all PDEVs from all array groups. Capacity Manager assumes that all PDEVs are part of an array group, so PDEVs that are marked as “not included in an array group” (-1) are included in the capacity calculation. That is, no disks are treated as spares.
Allocated Size
Total raw capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.Unallocated storage is storage that is not part of an Array Group.
Available Size
Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report.
% Available
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning. This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as Available Size.
Raw Usage Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been assigned to a host and that are not available for provisioning.
216 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
RAID Group Capacity
The RAID Group information can be used to identify array group statistics.
LUN Capacity
Several LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine the capacity of each configured LUN.
# RAID Groups The number of array groups in the storage array. Links to List Array Groups.
RAID Groups Capacity Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks
Virtual Capacity
Capacity from a back-end systemApplicable to HDS arrays onlyDerived from daisy-chained external storage (back-end systems); This is array group capacity that does not have PDEVs in the storage array.
RAID Groups Used Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage array.
RAID Groups Available Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
RAID Group Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage used
# LUNsThe number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report.
# Allocated LUNs
The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. storage array array port host storage domain HBA port host
Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report.
Allocated LUN Capacity
The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs.
UnAllocated LUNs
The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated.
UnAllocated LUN Capacity
The available LUN capacity.
LUN Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage allocated
Array Capacity and Utilization 217
List Array GroupsThis report provides a summary of each of the array groups associated with a storage array, with drilldowns to additional details.
Group Name The name of the array group, which links to Array Group Details.
Array Name The array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.Chassis Number The chassis to which the group belongs.RAID Type RAID typeTotal Capacity Total storage capacity of the group.Allocated Capacity Allocated storage capacityFree Capacity Available storage
218 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Host Capacity & Utilization To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & UtilizationUse the Host Capacity and Utilization report to view an overview of host utilization.Typically, once you’ve reviewed this high-level report, you’ll want to access the details reported by the Host Utilization Detail.
Host The name of the host utilizing the storage. Click on a Host name link to view the Host Utilization Detail.
# of Allocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have been allocated to this host. Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary.
Allocated Capacity The total capacity of all Volumes both free and used that has been given to the host. When there is a significant discrepancy between the Allocated Capacity and the Used Capacity, it is an indication that there may be storage that can be reclaimable.
# of Used LUNs LUNs that are currently used by the host. Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary.
Used Capacity The sum of all SAN capacity actually deployed or accepted by the host. This is the storage that the host has been allocated and is using—but this use could be as simple as adding the storage to a volume group. It does not mean that the server has that storage mounted. Mounted storage is reflected in Volume Capacity.
# of Arrays The total arrays associated with this host. Click on the number to launch the Array Capacity and Utilization.
Related Hosts Hosts that are related to this host via clustering—they have multipathing to the same LUNs for failover.
# Volumes The number of volumes created from the allocated LUNs, broken out into SAN/DAS, NAS, and At Risk.
Host Capacity & Utilization 219
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Volume Capacity Total storage capacity of the host, including SAN/DAS and NAS.
Volume Usage This is the actual amount of storage used by the host, broken out by storage type: SAN/DAS and NAS.
# of Volumes at Risk The number of host volumes that are at risk of reaching capacity, based on configured thresholds. Click on the number link to view the Host Utilization Detail.
220 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Host Utilization DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & UtilizationThen, drill down to the details.Click a # of Volumes at Risk link.In addition, this report can be accessed from several other reports via drill-down links, as shown in the following table:
Use this Host Utilization Detail report to quickly determine critical capacity issues. In particular, focus on the % Available column to find specific at-risk volumes. When a host falls below the designated threshold, the data in the % Available column displays in a different color to call your attention to the problem.
Figure 16.1 Host Utilization Detail (Overview)
From this Report: Click this Link:LUN Utilization Summary HostHost Utilization Summary HostArray Port Utilization HostLUNs At Risk HostHosts At Risk Name
Host Utilization Detail 221
Figure 16.2 Host Utilization Detail (Part 1)
Figure 16.3 Host Utilization Detail (Part 2)
222 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Mount Point Mount point of the file system
Raw File System File system name
File System Type
When you know the file system type, you can determine the host’s storage requirements and limitations.
Examples of file system values:• NTFS - Windows NT File System• ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3• ufs - Unix File System• vxfs - Veritas File System• FAT - File Allocation Table• hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple)• ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System• devfs - Device File System• hsfs - High Sierra File System• jfs - Journaled File System• jfs2 - Journaled File System 2• nfs - Network File System• objfs - File System Object• sfs - Secure File System• gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM)• proc - a virtual file system• procfs - Process File System• tmpfs - a virtual memory file system• smbfs - Server Message Block File System• Null - empty• NA - not applicable
Storage Type
• NAS - Network-attached storage; file servers and software dedicated to providing files over a network.
• SAN - Storage area network; Fibre Channel connected file servers.
• DAS - direct-attached storage; part of the host computer.
Volume Group The volume group and logical volume names.
Capacity The host’s file system storage capacity.
Used The amount of the host’s storage that is currently in use.
% Available The percentage of the capacity that is unused.
Host Utilization Detail 223
Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.
90 Days Min Used90 Days Avg Used90 Days Max Used
Use these three columns in combination to substantiate the need for additional storage. Using 90 days worth of data, this provides a realistic snapshot of how the forecast was derived.
NAS SharesThis Network Attached Storage Shares table provides details similar to the mount point table, without the Volume Group column.
Allocated and Unused LUNs
Shows any LUNs that have not been partitioned or allocated to a volume group. Therefore, they are not associated with a mount point or file system. This list will be displayed for LUNs that match this “allocated but unused” criteria.
Disks
Lists the disks associated with the host’s utilization. This table can be expanded and contracted with the + or - signs at the left of the Disks label.
Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks.
Multi-pathed disks also are represented in this list. Multi-pathing is supported for the following products: EMC PowerPath, Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager (HDLM), and Symantec Dynamic Multi Pathing (DMP).
Disk Partitions/Volume Group Details
Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details highlight inefficient use of storage.
This table will be present only when there are one or more volume groups set up on the selected host. The table displays each volume group along with the physical disks that have been allocated to the volume group and the logical volume details. Use this table to find any un-allocated storage—that is, space that is available within the volume group that has not been assigned to a logical volume.
If the Array name is missing from a table entry it is because it is a local disk.
Note: Totals in a Volume Group reflect usable capacity—so, for example, RAID 1 mirrored disks will show only the capacity that is usable.
Group MembershipDisplays the server groups for which the host is a member. Click on a server group link to view additional membership details.
224 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
LUN Utilization Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization SummaryIf LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their allocation or reassign them altogether. Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.• For NetApp-specific LUN Utilization details, see NetApp LUN Utilization Summary.• For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
This report can be filtered (in the Report Designer window) to report on the following subsets of data:• Unallocated - These are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any host. The array has
created the LUN, but there is no storage path.• Allocated, but undiscovered - Often referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that
have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN has been zoned to the host.
• Allocated, but unused - These are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has
LUN Utilization Summary 225
created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage details—disks, partitions, and volume groups—are not available for the host associated with the storage path.
Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated, but undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.
Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical detailed view, including mount point details. This arrow is not displayed if the LUN does not have multiple mount points or has no mount points.
Name The name of the LUN.Raid Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates
Disk, there is no RAID protection.Aggregate (NetApp only)Volume (NetApp only)QTree QTree associated with the LUN (NetApp only)Array Group The group to which the array belongs. Links to the Array
Group Details.Array Name The array on which the LUN was created. Click on the array
name link to go to the Array Capacity & Utilization report.Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.Estimated Used LUN estimated used. See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability.Estimated Available Estimated available LUN storage.Mount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point. These
values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount point details.
Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.
Note: It’s possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it.
File System The host’s file system or drive name to which the LUN maps. LUNs simply appear as disks to hosts.
Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.
iGroup Initiator Group name. For NetApp storage, a LUN is mapped to an iGroup—a method of LUN masking.
226 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Host Storage Domain The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability.
Note: A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.
Array Port WWN The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port address.
Last Updated The time stamp of the last host update.iSCSI Interface The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a
LUN. (NetApp only)
LUN Utilization Summary 227
Estimated LUN Usage/AvailabilitySeveral Capacity Manager reports display certain LUN values as estimated—Estimated Usage, Estimated Available. These values are estimated because of the following logic for deriving the values:• A volume group has members that are made up of many disks.• These disks may be local disks or LUNs from one or more arrays.• Partitions are created from a volume group and then the partition is mounted onto a host, so
that the host can use the mounted partition.• Because of the above sequence, Capacity Manager cannot determine which partition
came from which LUN. Therefore, using the available information, the values are estimated.
228 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Array Group DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization SummaryThen, drill down to the details:Click an Array Group link.
This report lists all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array group.
EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group SpecificsFor EMC CLARiiON storage arrays, the operating system uses a small amount of storage for internal processing. So, in the Array Group Details report, you will notice a difference in the Total (at the top left of the report) and the sum of the Capacity in the List of Physical Devices table (at the bottom right of the report).
Array Group Details 229
Array Port UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Port UtilizationThis report provides a list of the physical/logical port connections between the host’s adapter and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Array Name
The array you want to manage. Links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.You can select multiple storage arrays or a single array when you generate this report.
Array Port WWN World Wide Name, of the array port address.
Host Name of the host that owns the HBA (host bus adaptor) port. Links to the Host Utilization Detail.
Host Ports List of the host ports.
Mount Point The mount point of the file system that’s utilizing the port.
File System Name of the file system.
230 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
File System Type
When you know the file system type, you can determine the host’s storage requirements and limitations.
Examples of file system values:• NTFS - Windows NT File System• ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3• ufs - Unix File System• vxfs - Veritas File System• FAT - File Allocation Table• hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple)• ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System• devfs - Device File System• hsfs - High Sierra File System• jfs - Journaled File System• jfs2 - Journaled File System 2• nfs - Network File System• objfs - File System Object• sfs - Secure File System• gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM)• proc - a virtual file system• procfs - Process File System• tmpfs - a virtual memory file system• smbfs - Server Message Block File System• Null - empty• NA - not applicable
Capacity Capacity of the file system.
Used The amount of the storage array being used by the file system.
Array Port Utilization 231
Array Capacity Forecast To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Array Capacity ForecastUse the Capacity Forecast report to project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:• Historical date range• Forecast horizon (date range)• Storage Array Group• Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity
In addition, you can choose to generate graphs for each, individual array or instead, display a consolidated graph for all the arrays selected in the Report Designer.
Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:• Historical Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity• Forecasted Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity
The Array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Array The name of the storage array. Links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.
Allocated CapacityThis line tracks the historical and forecasted allocation.
Total CapacityThis line tracks the historical and forecasted capacity.
232 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Host Capacity Forecast To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Host Capacity ForecastThis forecast report provides an at-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage. Note: To ensure that your report reflects both historical and forecasted usage, when you generate the report, verify that your date range starts on a past date and ends on a future date. The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting. Typically, if you specify three months before and after the current day, you’ll have sufficient data for a valid forecast. The default display is Grouped by Months. However, to see results based on previous weeks, choose Group by Weeks in the Report Designer. The Group by Weeks option is especially useful during the first few weeks of Capacity Manager deployment.
You also can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.When you generate this report, you can select the type of output—either by host or by file system. If you select file system, the specific path, host name, and mount point will be associated with each graph.
1. Mouse-over the thermometer to view usage.
2. Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:• Historical Usage: Average and Maximum Size• Forecasted Usage: Average and Maximum Size
3. Click the Host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
4. Click the Total Volumes link to view the Host Capacity Forecast by File System.
Date The first day of the period for which the usage is projected.
Avg Size The historical average usage.
Max Size The historical maximum usage.
Host Capacity Forecast 233
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Avg Size Future The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).
Max Size Future The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).
234 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Applications At RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Applications At RiskUsing this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space. Identify which applications are expected to run out of storage and when.
Note: The Applications at Risk report supports the following applications: SQL Server and Oracle Database.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Name The application at risk.
Risk Date The first date of the period for which the usage is projected.The risk date is based on the historical growth of the application’s usage.
Usage The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical aver-age usage for periods in history).
Projected High-Water Mark
The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).
Capacity The database capacity.
Current Usage Database storage already in use.
Threshold
Thresholds can be set by an administrator usingAdmin > Threshold Policies. When determining when an application is “at risk,” several factors are taken into consideration. First, if a threshold has been set for a particular application—that is, a database threshold—then that threshold is used to determine the risk. If there is no threshold associated with the application’s database, then other thresholds are checked, in the following sequence:• Host for the associated LUN/Filesystem/Database• Server group to which the host belongs• Top-level, global server group• If no threshold settings are found at the above levels, the system defaults
are used: 90% for Critical, 70% for Warning, and 30% for Low.
Applications At Risk 235
Over-Provisioned ApplicationsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Over Provisioned ApplicationsUsing this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storage. Often, storage is allocated to a project, but never used. This report helps you to identify excess, unused storage so that it can be reclaimed for another purpose.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Name The application that has been given storage that remains unused.
As of The first date of the period for which the usage is projected.
Usage The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).
High-Water Mark The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).
Capacity The database capacity
Current Usage Database storage already in use
Available Amount of storage still available
Threshold An application is determined to be over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold.
236 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Application Storage Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage Dashboard
This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. In addition, this report provides data that can be used to resolve performance issues. The table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage.
Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard view. Each subsequent drilldown takes you to the next level of the applica-tion, such as the table space and file system level.
Application
The name of the level. For the application level, the name will be specific to the application, such as Exchange or Oracle. If it is the tablespace level, the name of the respective tablespace is displayed.
App. Total
Total storage allocated to the application.App. Used + App. Free = App. Total
Note: The total may not be precise to the decimal, as 1 Kbyte = 1024.
App. FreeAmount of storage available for the application. In some cases, storage does not need to be pre-allocated to the application, so this field will display as N/A.
App. Used
Amount of storage consumed by the application. This is the amount of consumed storage as reported by the application. For example, in Oracle within a data file it would display how much space is really being consumed by Oracle.
File Total This total indicates the amount of storage used by the file sys-tem associated with the application.
File Free Amount of unused and available file system storage.
Application Storage Dashboard 237
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
File Used Amount of used file system storage.
Array Total This total indicates the amount of storage used by the array on which this application is located.
Array Free Amount of available array storage.
Array Used Amount of used array storage.
LUNs A concatenated list of LUNs from which the space is being taken by this application.
238 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage DashboardTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage DashboardThen, click the arrow to drill down to the Application Level detail.
The data displayed in this window is simply the next level within the application—that is, instance-level reporting, as described in Application Storage Dashboard. At the application sub-level, a host link launches the Host Utilization Detail.For example, an Oracle Database Administrator may be interested in managing storage at the tablespace level. Using the Application Storage Dashboard, the administrator can expand the Oracle application to view table space and also file system usage. In essence, this view provides the physical implementation of the file system, including the LUNs allocated to it.
Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard 239
Available/Reclaimable StorageThe reports in this menu group provide the data for realizing your ROI—Return on Investment. By identifying underutilized storage, an enterprise can optimize existing storage resources and possibly defer purchases.
Array Utilization SummaryThis report can be used to identify the percentage of raw storage that has been allocated to RAID groups and, more importantly, the percentage of raw capacity that is available.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Storage Array or VFiler - NetApp Storage System Detail• # Groups - List Array Groups• # LUNs - LUN Utilization Summary
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
240 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Allocated but Unused LUNsThese are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage details—disks, partitions, and volume groups—are not available for the host associated with the storage path.
Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization• Host - Host Utilization Detail
For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Available/Reclaimable Storage 241
Allocated but Undiscovered LUNsOften referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN has been zoned to the host.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization
For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
242 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Unallocated LUNsThese are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any hosts. The array has created the LUNs, but there are no storage paths.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization
For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Available/Reclaimable Storage 243
Suspected De-provisioned HostsSometimes LUNs have been assigned to a host, but later, that host is re-assigned or de-provisioned. Often when hosts are retired, their storage is not given back to the pool and that storage remains unused.Capacity Manager identifies suspected de-provisioned hosts by determining data staleness—that is, finding hosts for which data has not been collected within the specified time period. The default period is 14 days, however, you can choose from 3 days to a year for the report’s time period. Hosts in this list deserve further investigation to determine if they truly have been de-provisioned.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization• Host - Host Utilization Detail
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
244 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Unused Partitions/Logical VolumesThis report lists all hosts with logical volumes that have no mounted file systems. A logical volume may have been created in the volume group, but the logical volume is not being used by the host. These unused volumes provide available storage.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Host - Host Utilization Detail
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Available/Reclaimable Storage 245
Unused Disks/Volume GroupsUse this report to view a list of hosts that have available space. These hosts have space from which more partitions or logical volumes can be created. This report can be used to identify storage that has been requested, but that is not being used. Then, the list can be emailed to the group that has requested the storage.Note: In this report, if the RAID type = 1, the capacity is divided by 2, to reflect true usable capacity.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Host Name - Host Utilization Detail
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
246 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Capacity Chargeback and BillingCapacity Chargeback Policies are configured by the StorageConsole Administrator. The administrator uses these policies to assign a cost-per-GB and tier, to hosts in a server group. The tier is assigned by default, as it is associated with the storage array family, as shown in the following table. The array family is passed in by data collection and the billing report uses the family to determine the tier.Storage Tier assignments represent how data is classified in your organization, providing a means of offering specific service levels to departments and projects.
Table 16.1 Default Storage Array Tier Settings for Capacity Chargebacks
Storage Array Tier
AMS 1
HDS 9900 1
HDS 9200 1
HDS 9500V 1
WMS 1
HDS 9900V 1
Symmetrix 3000 1
Symmetrix 5000 1
Symmetrix 8000 1
Symmetrix DMX 1
AX Series 1
CX Series 1
CX3 Series 1
USP 1
Capacity Chargeback and Billing 247
Utilization By Host To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Utilization By HostFor additional details, refer to:• Capacity Chargeback and Billing for a list of storage arrays and default tier settings.• Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.
Host Host name
IP Address Host’s IP address
248 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Storage Tier
The tier to which the array belongs. The tier implies the importance to your business. • Tier 1. Used for business-critical data and I/O intensive
applications.• Tier 2. Used for important, but not business-critical data or
low I/O intensive applications.• Tier 3. Used for less critical data.
# of LUNs Total number of LUNs currently in use.
Usage The explicit amount of storage in use.
Cost Per GB The rate that was set in the billing and chargeback policy.
Total Cost Usage * Cost-per-GB = Total Cost
Capacity Chargeback and Billing 249
Utilization By Storage TierTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Utilization By Storage TierFor additional details, refer to:• Capacity Chargeback and Billing for a list of storage arrays and default tier settings.• Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Storage Tier
The tier to which the array belongs. The tier implies the importance to your business. • Tier 1. Used for business-critical data and I/O intensive
applications.• Tier 2. Used for important, but not business-critical data or
low I/O intensive applications.• Tier 3. Used for less critical data.
Cost Per GB The rate that was set in the chargeback policy.
# of Hosts Total number of Hosts currently using storage.
# of LUNs Total number of LUNs currently in use.
Total SAN Storage The explicit amount of storage in use.
Total Cost Usage * Cost-per-GB = Total Cost
250 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Utilization By Server GroupsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Utilization By Server GroupsFor additional details, refer to:• Capacity Chargeback and Billing for a list of storage arrays and default tier settings.• Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.
Note: When you run this report, be sure to select one or more Server Groups for the scope.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Group Server Group
Storage Tier
The tier to which the array belongs. The tier implies the importance to your business. • Tier 1. Used for business-critical data and I/O intensive
applications.• Tier 2. Used for important, but not business-critical data or
low I/O intensive applications.• Tier 3. Used for less critical data.
# of Hosts Total number of Hosts currently using storage.
# of LUNs Total number of LUNs currently in use.
Total SAN Storage The explicit amount of storage in use.
Cost Per GB The rate that was set in the chargeback policy.
Total Cost Usage * Cost-per-GB = Total Cost
Capacity Chargeback and Billing 251
LUNs At Risk Pro-actively increase LUN capacity and avoid outages or performance issues associated with insufficient capacity.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > LUNs At RiskWhen you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical. Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical LUNs—that is, those that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold and running out of space.Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.
NameThe specific logical unit number that is at risk of running out of room. Click on this link to access details in the LUN Utilization Summary.
Risk Date (Projected) The date that the LUN is projected to exceed its threshold and will no longer be considered over-provisioned.
Usage (Projected) Usage based on the period that you’ve selected.
High-Water Mark (Projected)
The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the history for the report’s selected period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage.
Array The group to which this LUN belongs.
Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.
Raw File System The explicit full directory path for the file system.
252 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Host Storage Domain
The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability.
Note: Host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for its multi-hosted storage capability.
Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.
Current Usage The amount of storage already committed.
Host Name Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.
Threshold
A LUN is determined to be at risk when this tolerance thresh-old is crossed. The default thresholds are set at:• Low = 30%• Warning = 70%• Critical = 90%
To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold PoliciesFor additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.
LUNs At Risk 253
Over-Provisioned LUNs To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned LUNsIf you’ve over-provisioned LUNs, you really want to know. Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space.When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be displayed. Typically, you’ll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.
Name The LUN number/ID.As of This date indicates when the LUN became over-provisioned.High-Water Mark (Projected)
The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the history for the report’s selected period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage.
Host Name Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail.Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.Array The array to which the LUN belongs.Mount Point Location of the file system.Raw File System
Explicit disk location of the LUN.
Host Storage Domain
The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.
Volume Group
The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.
254 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Current Usage
Amount of storage currently used.
Threshold A LUN is determined to be over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold. The default thresholds are set at:• Low = 30%• Warning = 70%• Critical = 90%
To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold PoliciesFor additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.
Over-Provisioned LUNs 255
Hosts at Risk To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Hosts At RiskWhen you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical. Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical hosts—that is, those that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold.This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars.
Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that hosts at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.
Host Name Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization Detail.
Risk Date (Projected) The date that the host is projected to exceed its threshold and will no longer be considered over-provisioned.
Usage (Projected) Projected usage associated with the risk date.
High-Water Mark (Projected)
The high-water mark represents the maximum usage for a period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage
Capacity The host’s storage limit.
256 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Current Usage Storage already consumed.
Threshold
A host becomes at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at:• Low = 30%• Warning = 70%• Critical = 90%
To modify thresholds for a particular host, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold PoliciesFor additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.
Hosts at Risk 257
Over-Provisioned HostsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned HostsBy determining which hosts are over-provisioned, you can take steps to reclaim the space before committing resources to acquire additional storage. Over-provisioning leads to increased costs as a result of under-utilized storage.When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be displayed. Typically, you’ll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Name Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization Detail.
As of (Projected) This date indicates when the host became over-provisioned.
Usage (Projected) Projected consumption by the host.
High-Water Mark (Projected)
High-Water Mark = Capacity * Threshold
Capacity The host’s storage limit.
Current Usage Storage already consumed.
Threshold
A host becomes over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold. The default thresholds are set at:• Low = 30%• Warning = 70%• Critical = 90%
To modify thresholds for a particular host, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold PoliciesFor additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.
258 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 17Chapter 16NetApp Capacity Reports
Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, overconsumption, and underutilized storage. The data collected from NetApp storage is displayed in the reports described in this chapter.This chapter covers the following topics:• Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)• NetApp Storage System Detail• NetApp LUN Utilization Summary• NetApp Aggregate Summary• NetApp Aggregate Detail• NetApp Plex Details• NetApp Volume Summary• NetApp Volume Details• NetApp NFS Summary• NetApp CIFS Summary• QTree Summary• NetApp Snapshot Summary• Array iSCSI Port Utilization• NetApp Disk Summary• NetApp Aggregates at Risk• NetApp Volumes at Risk• Thin Provisioning Overview
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
259
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationBecause NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructs—such as Aggregates and Volumes—to organize and access its storage, additional data is available via drilldown links.
The report is organized into four columns:1. NetApp Summary
2. Raw Capacity
3. Aggregate/Volume Capacity - Pools of available storage can be found in existing RAID groups. Even though storage may be 100% allocated at the array level, the RAID group utilization will reveal the amount of remaining, usable storage.
4. LUN Capacity
260 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
NetApp SummaryThis section of the report provides a overview of the storage system, with links to rele-vant components.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Storage ArrayThe name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide.
Model The specific model of the NetApp storage.
Status The current status of the storage. Mouse over this status to view details.
ProductThe name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array.
# FC Ports Number of Fibre Channel ports
# iSCSI Ports Links to Array iSCSI Port Utilization.
# CIFS Share Links to NetApp CIFS Summary.
# NFS Export Links to NetApp NFS Summary.
# Disks Links to NetApp Disk Summary.
# Hosts
The number of hosts that are sharing the capacity. This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected.
Host Usage Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
% Used Percentage of the NetApp storage already utilized.
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) 261
Raw CapacityThis column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.
Aggregate/Volume CapacityThis column provides an overview of the aggregate (not for VFilers) and volume (for VFilers) capacity and utilization.
Capacity
Total raw capacity of the storage array.
This sums all PDEVs (including spares—that is, drives that are not allocated to an Aggregate). If the RAID state of the PDEV is partner or broken, the disk is not included in the raw capacity calculation.
You can set the capacity units to be displayed, either GB or MB, by selecting the Advanced option when you generate the report.
Allocated SizeTotal raw capacity of the logical unit numbers (LUNs) in the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.
Available SizeTotal raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report.
% Available
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning. This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as Available Size.
Raw Usage Expressed as a percentage, total capacity that has been assigned to a host and that is not available for provisioning.
# Aggregates Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary.
Aggr Capacity The aggregate’s total size
Aggr Used Amount of the aggregate’s capacity that is in use
Aggr Available Available storage in the aggregate
Aggr Usage Used data storage at the physical layerMouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.
# Total Volumes The number of volumes defined for this NetApp unitLinks to the NetApp Volume Summary.
# Thin Prov Vols
The number of thin provisioned volumes
Includes volumes where the Space Guarantee value equals “file” or “none.”
Volume Capacity Total capacity for all associated volumes
262 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
LUN CapacityThe LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine the capacity of each configured LUN.
Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.
Volume Used Total of used space for all the associated volumes
Volume Available Available capacity from all of the associated volumes
Volume Usage Used data storage at the logical layerMouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.
# LUNs The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.
Total LUN Capacity Total storage capacity for all of the associated LUNs
# Allocated LUNs
The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. For NetApp, these are the LUNs associated with an iGroup.
Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.
AllocLUN Capacity The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs
# UnAllocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated
UnAllocated LUN Capacity
The available LUN capacity
LUN Usage % of LUN capacity that is currently in use
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) 263
NetApp Storage System DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click the Array Name link.
Current Configuration
Name Name of the NetApp storageIP Address IP address of the storage unitONTAP Version Version of the NetApp ONTAP operating systemDomain Name The DNS domain name
264 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Aggregate Utilization
Volume Utilization
Capacity Usage Bar Charts
Auth Type Indicates the type of authentication:• ad - Active Directory• nt4 - Windows NT4• workgroup - Workgroup• passwd - Password file, NIS, or LDAP
Security Style NTFS or MultiprotocolServer Name Server nameWindows Type Windows software versionLast Updated Last time the portal database was updated with data collected from the
NetApp system
Aggregate Utilization
The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the information that is available in the NetApp Aggregate Summary.Drill down on the “Top 3 of n Aggregate Utilization” to see additional aggregates.• Name• Usage• Total Capacity• Allocated Size• Available Size
Volume Utilization
The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the information that is available in the NetApp Volume Summary.Drill down on the “Top 3 of n Volume Utilization” to see additional volumes.• Name• Usage• Total Capacity• Allocated Size• Available Size
Capacity Usage Bar Charts
A cascade of bar charts represents usage by:• Array - Displays total capacity, the amount used by system overhead,
and spare capacity.• Aggregate - Of the total capacity, what is used by the aggregate• Volume - Volume usage, including specific snapshot details• LUN/Shares/QTrees
NetApp Storage System Detail 265
NetApp LUN Utilization SummaryThis NetApp-specific report can be accessed via a LUN link in NetApp-specific reports, such as the NetApp Volume Summary report. A similar report is available for all storage arrays in your environment. See LUN Utilization Summary.Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.
Name The name of the LUN.Raid Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates
Disk, there is no RAID protection.Aggregate Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary.Volume Links to the NetApp Volume Summary.QTree Name of the QTree to which this LUN belongs. Links to the
QTree Summary.Storage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.Estimated Used LUN estimated used. See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability.Estimated Available Amount of LUN estimated to be available
266 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Mount Point The amount of storage used by each mount point. These values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount point details.
Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.
Note: It’s possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it.
File System The host’s file system or drive name to which the LUN maps. LUNs simply appear as disks to hosts.
Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.
iGroup Initiator Group name for NetApp storage; a LUN is mapped to an iGroup—a method of LUN masking.
Host Storage Domain The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability.
Note: A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.
Array Port WWN The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port address.
Last Updated Last LUN updateiSCSI Interface The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a
LUN. (NetApp only)Space Reserved Indicates if LUN space reservation is enabled
NetApp LUN Utilization Summary 267
NetApp Aggregate SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Aggregate SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Aggregates.View this report for an overview of how your aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and plexes. The Aggregate Utilization Summary displays one row for each aggregate, with links to Volume and Plex details. Note: If the aggregate is mirrored, two Plexes will be listed.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Aggregate The Aggregate number/IDStorage Array The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associatedUsage Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % availableTotal Capacity The aggregate’s total capacityAllocated Size Amount of capacity that has been allocated for useAvailable Size Remaining capacity available for useRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-
parity protection)# Volumes Links to the NetApp Volume Summary# of Thin Prov Vols
Number of thin provisioned volumes
List of Plexes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes—2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to the NetApp Plex Details report.
268 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
NetApp Aggregate DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Aggregates.Then, click an Aggregate Name link.The Aggregate Detail forecasts usage, based on historical data. Mouse over the Volume and Aggregate symbols to view the historical and projected usage.
Aggregate Capacity UsageAt the bottom of the window, the cascade of usage bars illustrates the logical subsets of the aggregate. • Mouse over the colored bar segments to view the actual values instead of the percentages.
NetApp Aggregate Detail 269
NetApp Plex DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Aggregates.Note: The # of Aggregates is not listed for a VFiler, as it is not relevant.
Then, in the Aggregate Utilization Summary, click a Plex link.This drilldown sequence launches the Plex Details report, which displays a list of details for each of the disks in the Plex’s disk pool. Use this report to understand how the RAID groups and disks are organized and configured.
RAID Reconstruction Status:
Plex Disk Pool Details:
Name Name of the PlexIs Reconstructing? Y or N
During RAID reconstruction, as a result of a disk failure, redundant data is read from other disks to recreate the blocks from the failed disk.
Reconstruction % If reconstruction is in progress, this value shows the completion percentage.
Name The Disk nameStorage Array NetApp storage system name—links to the NetApp Storage
System DetailAggregate The Aggregate associated with the volume—links to the
NetApp Aggregate DetailDisk Type Disk Type: ATA, EATA, FCAL, LUN, SAS, SATA, SCSI,
XATA, XSAS, or unknown. Capacity The Disk’s total capacityVendor Disk Vendor
270 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Disk Model Disk ModelRAID State RAID state: broken, copy, partner, pending, present,
reconstructing, spare, or zeroingRAID Type RAID type: pending, parity, dparity, or dataRAID Status Possible status: copying, degraded, foreign, growing,
initializing, invalid, ironing, mirror degraded, mirrored, needs check, noparity, normal, out-of-date, partial, raid0, raid4, raid_dp, reconstruct, resyncing, snapmirrored, verifying, unrecoverable
Serial # Disk serial numberRAID Group The RAID group to which the disk belongsFirmware Revision Disk firmware revision number
NetApp Plex Details 271
NetApp Volume SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Volumes.Each volume depends on its aggregate for its physical storage. Both Traditional and FlexVol volumes contain directories and files; they also can contain QTrees and LUNs.
Volume Name of the volumeLinks to the NetApp Volume Details.
Storage Array The name of the NetApp physical storage for the volumeAggr The name of the associated aggregatePct Usage Percentage of the aggregate that is in useSpace Guarantee
The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.• Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.
Type Flex for flexible volumes, Trad for traditional volumesRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-parity
protection)Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the volume’s % availableTotal Capacity The volume’s total capacity. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is
displayed.
272 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Allocated Size Amount of volume space in use. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed.
Available Size Amount of space available on the volume. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed.
# QTrees Links to the QTree Summary.# LUNs Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.# Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to the NetApp CIFS
Summary.# Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to the NetApp NFS
Summary.# Snapshots The number of snapshots using this volume. Links to the NetApp
Snapshot Summary.
NetApp Volume Summary 273
NetApp Volume DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume SummaryThen, click Volume Name.
274 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Volume Summary Status
Quota Status
Volume Name of the volumeLinks to the NetApp Volume Details.
Storage Array The name of the NetApp physical storage for the volumeAggr The name of the associated aggregatePct Usage Percentage of the aggregate that is in useSpace Guarantee
The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.• Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.
Type Flex for flexible volumes, Trad for traditional volumesRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-parity
protection)Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the volume’s % availableTotal Capacity The volume’s total capacity. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is
displayed.Allocated Size Amount of volume space in use. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is
displayed.Available Size Amount of space available on the volume. If the volume is offline or
restricted, 0 is displayed.# QTrees Links to the QTree Summary.# LUNs Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.# Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to the NetApp CIFS
Summary.# Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to the NetApp NFS
Summary.# Snapshots The number of snapshots using this volume. Links to the NetApp
Snapshot Summary.
Status Indicates if quotas are enabled: yes or noSub-Status Minor quota status for the volume, valid only when the status is either
resizing or initializing. The sub-status could be: scanning, etc scanning, setup, queue scan, done, or none.
Reason If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the last quota error message.
Quota Errors If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the collection of quota errors, including the reason code.
NetApp Volume Details 275
Snapshot Schedule Details
This section displays the volume’s current snapshot schedule.
Quota Details
Days Number of daily snapshots takenHours Number of hourly snapshots takenMinutes Number of snapshots taken each minuteWeeks Number of weekly snapshots takenWhich Hours A list of hours when the hourly snapshots are takenWhich Minutes A list of minutes when the by-minutes snapshots are taken
Quota Type User, group, or treeQuota Target Name, number, or path name—relevant to the quota typeTree Name of the QTree for this quotaDisk Used Current amount of disk space— “-” indicates unlimitedHard Disk Limit The amount of disk space reserved for the target—“-” indicates
unlimited.Soft Disk Limit Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target
exceeds this limit—“-” indicates unlimited.Threshold When the target exceeds this amount of disk space, a message is loggedFile Used Current number of files used by the quota targetHard File Limit Number of files allowed for the targetSoft File Limit Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target
exceeds this limit— “-” indicates unlimited.Quota User Name Name of the User, Group, or SID (Windows security ID)
276 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
NetApp NFS SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp NFS SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click a # NFS Exports link.NetApp volumes that are exported via the NFS protocol are listed in this report. Using this report, you can identify who is using the NFS shares.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Path Name The pathname of the fileVolume Name of the volume, which links to the NetApp Volume Details.QTree Name of the associated QTreeStorage Array Link to the NetApp Storage System Detail.Host Type Host NFS permission type: read-only, read-write, rootRoot Host Name The name of the root hostHost IP address or host name of the host to which the file system is exportedHost Mount Point The mount point of the host that is using the volumeTotal Capacity Total capacity associated with the path and volumeUsed Capacity Amount of capacity that is used by NFS clientsFree Capacity Available capacity for NFS client use
NetApp NFS Summary 277
NetApp CIFS SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp CIFS SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # CIFS Shares.View the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts through CIFS (Common Internet File System) shares. This report displays the usage of each share.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Name Directory name of the shareMount Point Mount point of the shareMax User The maximum number of simultaneous connections to the share—0
indicates no limitIs Volume Offline Indicates if the volume is offline—Yes or NoForce Group This group overrides the group of the file’s owner, so if this field is
blank, it defaults to the file owner’s group.Volume Name of the volume links to the NetApp Volume Summary.QTree Name of the associated QTree links to the QTree SummaryStorage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.Description Description of the shareHost Name Name of the host that is using the volumeHost Mount Point The home directory of the host that is using the volumeTotal Capacity Total size of the shareUsed Capacity Amount of storage used by the shareFree Capacity Available capacity
278 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
QTree SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp QTree SummaryA QTree is the mechanism used to partition a volume, enabling the management of storage by project, user, or group. Use this QTree Summary to view the quota management configurations for the QTrees within a storage system. Then, drill down to view how each volume is partitioned.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Qtree Name of the QTree, or if the ID is 0, the name of the volume is displayedStorage Array Name of the associated NetApp storage systemID ID of the QTree, which is unique within a volume. An ID of 0 indicates
the volume itself.Oplocks Indicates if CIFS (Common Internet File System) opportunistic locks are
enabled/disabled.Security Style UNIX, NTFS, or mixedStatus SnapMirror backup status: Normal, Snapvaulted, Snapmirrored, or Read-
only (if a SnapMirror destination)Volume Name of the volume to which the QTree belongs. Links to the NetApp
Volume Summary.Aggregate Name of the aggregate to which the QTree belongs.Links to the NetApp
Aggregate Summary.# of LUNs The number of LUNs mapped to the QTree. To view the specific LUN
information, see the LUN Utilization Summary.# of Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to NetApp CIFS
Summary# of Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to NetApp NFS
Summary
QTree Summary 279
NetApp Snapshot SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Snapshot SummaryNetApp snapshots use pointers to reference the blocks where the data is stored, thereby using a minimal amount of capacity. A snapshot captures a point-in-time image of the file system data. When the next snapshot is taken, the pointers will reference other blocks, as the file system data blocks have changed in the interval between snapshots. Therefore, the access time provides the time reference for the snapshot block usage. Snapshots provide a read-only source of data for backups to tape.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Name Name of the snapshot scheduleStorage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System DetailVolume Links to the NetApp Volume DetailsAccess Time Time the snapshot was created. This value does not change when the snap-
shot is accessed.Total Blocks Number of 1024-byte blocks in this snapshotCumulative Blocks
Number of 1024-byte blocks—cumulative for current and previous snapshots
Dependency Lists the applications that depend on this snapshot: snapmirror, snapvault, dump, vclone, LUNs, or snaplock
Busy Indicates if an application is using the snapshotCumulative % of Used Blocks
The % of blocks used by this snapshot and all recent snapshots
Used Blocks Of all the blocks used on the volume, this is the % used by the snapshotCumulative % of Total Blocks
The % of blocks owned by this snapshot and all recent snapshots
% of Total Blocks
The % of all the volume’s blocks that is owned by this snapshot
280 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Array iSCSI Port UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click a # iSCSI Ports link.
Array Name The NetApp storage systemiSCSI Interface Name of the interfaceTarget Portal Name Name of the target portal group that coordinates the iSCSI session
with this NetApp systemTarget Group Tag Numeric ID of the disk storage target with which the portal group is
associated (TPGT - target portal group tag). iSCSI portal groups that are associated with target nodes have a target group tag ranging from 0 to 65535.
Host IP address or host name of the client initiator that is accessing the storage via the iSCSI port
Host iSCSI Name Identifies the host’s connection to the storage targetMount Point Mount point pathFile System File system pathFile System Type File system typeCapacity Total capacity availableUsed Amount of capacity in use
Array iSCSI Port Utilization 281
NetApp Disk SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Disk Summary
Using the Report Designer, you can filter the output of this report using the following parameter selections:• Storage Array• RAID State• Disk Type
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Name The Disk nameStorage Array The name of the NetApp storage systemAggregate The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp
Aggregate Detail.Disk Type Disk Type: ATA, EATA, FCAL, LUN, SAS, SATA, SCSI, XATA,
XSAS, or unknown. Capacity The Disk’s total capacityVendor Disk VendorDisk Model Disk ModelRAID State RAID state: broken, copy, partner, pending, present, reconstructing,
spare, or zeroingRAID Type RAID type: pending, parity, dparity, or dataRAID Status Possible status: copying, degraded, foreign, growing, initializing,
invalid, ironing, mirror degraded, mirrored, needs check, noparity, normal, out-of-date, partial, raid0, raid4, raid_dp, reconstruct, resyncing, snapmirrored, verifying, unrecoverable
Serial # Disk serial numberRAID Group The RAID group to which the disk belongsFirmware Revision Disk firmware revision number
282 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
NetApp Aggregates at RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Aggregates at RiskFor thin provisioning, it’s important to know when host usage is about to exceed the storage that was promised. The details shown in this aggregate report can help you understand the current physical capacity status. When an aggregate is at risk—the amount of used storage in the flexvol approaches the aggregate’s capacity—it can be re-sized to add physical disk space to the aggregate.See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.
Note: The Total Capacity value represents the amount of storage that has been committed or promised to hosts.
When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or Critical.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Aggregate The Aggregate number/ID link to NetApp Aggregate DetailStorage Array The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associated, which
drills down to NetApp Storage System DetailUsage Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % availableTotal Capacity The aggregate’s total capacityAllocated Capacity Amount of capacity that has been allocated for useAvailable Capacity Remaining capacity available for useRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-
parity protection)# Volumes at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at Risk# of Hosts at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at RiskList of Plexes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes—2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to
the NetApp Plex Details report.Risk Date The point at which the aggregate is at risk
NetApp Aggregates at Risk 283
NetApp Volumes at RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volumes at RiskWhen you configure thin provisioning, you enable multiple volumes to access the same pool of free storage. Since thin provisioning “commits” more storage to hosts than is actually available, it is important to identify the remaining, usable storage and the point at which the aggregate is at risk of not having available storage. See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.
When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or Critical.
Volume Volume name link to NetApp Volume DetailsStorage Array The name of the NetApp storage system, which links to NetApp
Storage System DetailAggregate The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp
Aggregate Detail.Aggregate Risk Date
The date at which the aggregate is expected to not have storage available for use
Space Guarantee The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.• Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.
Usage Mouse over the thermometer to see the % available.Total Capacity Total capacity of the volumeAllocated Capacity Amount of the volume’s capacity that has been allocated
284 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
Thin Provisioning OverviewBy using an over-subscription strategy, thin provisioning technology addresses the issue of inefficient storage utilization. Applications are given physical space from a storage pool when data is written to the application, avoiding the pre-allocation commitment required by traditional storage provisioning approaches. In this way, an application can appear to have more storage than is actually reserved for it. As the application’s data grows, it can be given more storage from the storage pool, with minimal management intervention. With thin provisioning, existing capacity can be more efficiently used, eliminating the need for over-provisioning and often delaying the acquisition of additional storage. Of course, given the fact that storage is over-promised and then actually dealt out as needed, it is incumbent upon the Storage Administrator to monitor storage usage so that an application’s write requests can be fulfilled without failures. StorageConsole provides the following key NetApp reports to facilitate this monitoring process:• NetApp Aggregates at Risk• NetApp Volumes at Risk
Available Capacity Amount of the volume’s capacity that is availableHost Name The host that is at risk of consuming more than the space guaranteed to
it.Host Usage Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the estimated % used by the
host.Mount Points The host’s mount points that are using the storageHost Capacity The capacity of the hostEstimate Used Estimated amount of storage used by the hostEstimate Available Estimated storage available for host consumption
Thin Provisioning Overview 285
286 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 18Chapter 16IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Overview of IBM Array Support• Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)• IBM Array Site Summary• IBM Array Summary• IBM Array Detail• IBM Rank Summary• IBM Extent Pool Summary• IBM Disk Summary
287
Overview of IBM Array SupportAPTARE StorageConsole supports data collection and reporting on the following LSI-based arrays. The LSI-based arrays include IBM DS/ESS and Sun StorageTek series, as well as SGI InfiniteStorage and Teradata Storage Systems.
IBM Arrays Sun Arrays LSIStorage System DS3300 Sun StorageTek 2510 LSI 1532Storage System DS3400 Sun StorageTek 2540 LSI 1932Storage System DS4700Express Model 70
Sun StorageTek 6140 LSI 3992
Storage System DS4700Express Model 72
Sun StorageTek 6140 LSI 3992
Storage System DS4800 Model 80 Sun StorageTek 6540 LSI 6998Storage System DS4800 Model 88 Sun StorageTek 6540 LSI 6998Storage System DS5000 Series Sun StorageTek 6780 LSI 7900
288 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)The following illustration represents an example of the view available for IBM Enterprise Arrays (6K/8K). For a description of the fields displayed, see IBM Array Detail.
Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View) 289
IBM Array Site SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Site SummaryFour or eight disk drive modules comprise an Array Site. Then, one or two Array Sites comprise an Array. An Array is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.
Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI
or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB.
• For FB open systems host, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable• Disk Classes: ENT, NL
Array Site The Array Site ID
Storage Array The physical storage system; Drill down to the IBM Array Detail.
DA Pair
Device adapter pair number—the physical I/O enclosure locationIf the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the enclosure
Capacity The capacity of all disks belonging to the Array Site
# of Disks Number of disks associated with this Array Site. Links to the IBM Disk Summary.
Array Name Links to the IBM Array Summary.
290 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Disk RPM The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000
State
assigned, unassigned, unavailable, initializingIndicates if the array site is assigned to the array. If the state is unavailable, its capacity is not included in the total array capacity calculation, as shown in the Array Capacity and Utilization report.
Disk Class Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)
IBM Array Site Summary 291
IBM Array SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Summary
Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI
or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB.
• For FB open systems host, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable• RAID Types: 5, 6, 10• Disk Classes: ENT, NL
Array The Array ID. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.
Storage Array The physical storage array system
Data State assigned, unassigned, unavailableIndicates if the data is assigned to a Rank.
RAID Type RAID 5, 6, or 10
# of Array Sites Drill down to the IBM Array Site Summary for details. An array can have 1 or 2 array sites.
Rank Drill down to the IBM Rank Summary.
DA Pair
Device adapter pair number—the physical I/O enclosure locationIf the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the enclosure
292 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
CapacityThe capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)—one or more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is the total for all the Array Sites in the array.
Disk Class Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)
IBM Array Summary 293
IBM Array DetailThis report is accessed via a link from other IBM Array reports.
Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI
or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB.
• For FB open systems host, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
IBM Storage Unit Summary
Storage Unit The Storage Unit ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and serial number
Storage Image The Storage Image ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and serial number
Model The storage unit model
StateState of the storage unit: online, offline, resuming, quiescing, quiesce exception, forced quiescing, fenced, discovery
Product IBM
# FC Ports Number of Fibre Channel ports; links to the Array Port Utilization report
# Disks Links to the IBM Disk Summary
Array Site Used Amount of array storage used by the Array Site
294 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Raw Capacity
Array Site Capacity
Array Capacity
Rank Capacity
# of Hosts Number of hosts mapped to this array; links to the Host Capacity & Utilization
Host Usage Amount of capacity used by hosts
Capacity Total array capacity
Allocated Size Amount of capacity that has been allocated
Available Size Amount of capacity that is free
Raw Capacity Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage
# of Array Sites The number of array sites to which this array belongs; links to the IBM Array Site Summary
Array Site Capacity Sum of the capacity of all the associated array sites, derived from the capacity of the disks in each array site
Array Site Used Sum of the array site capacity that is in used—that is, “assigned” to an array
Array Site Available Array Site storage that has not been allocated—that is, “unassigned” to an array
Array Site Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage
# of Arrays Links to the IBM Array Summary
Array CapacityThe capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)—one or more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is the total for all the Array Sites in the array.
Array Used If an array is assigned to a rank, it is “used”
Array Available Array capacity that is not part of a rank is “available”
Array Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage.
# of Ranks The number of ranks links to the IBM Rank Summary
Total Capacity Sum of the capacity of all ranks
Used Capacity Capacity assigned to an extent pool
IBM Array Detail 295
Extent Pool Capacity
Available Capacity Capacity not assigned to an extent pool
Rank Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the ranks that have been allocated.
# of Extent Pools Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary
FB Extent Pool Capacity
For FB, an extent is 1 GB. The sum of the capacity of all the fixed block extents in the extent pool
FB Extent Pool Used The amount of fixed block extent pool storage in assigned to a logical volume
FB Extent Pool Available
The fixed block extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical volume
FB Extent Pool Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the fixed block extent pool that is allocated.
CKD Extent Pool Capacity
For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).The sum of the capacity of all the CKD extents in the extent pool
CKD Extent Pool Used
The amount of the CKD extent pool storage in assigned to a logical volume
CKD Extent Pool Available
The CKD extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical volume
CKD Extent Pool Usage
Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the CKD extent pool that is allocated.
296 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Logical Volumes
This section provides the LUN mapping for determining capacity and usage.
Top 3 of n RanksClick on the link to view the complete list of Ranks.
Top 3 of n Extent PoolsClick on the link to view the complete list of Extent Pools.Either 1 or 2 Ranks can comprise an Extent Pool. When it is a 1-to-1 relationship, the Extent Pool capacity values will look identical to the Rank values. Otherwise, they will be double the Rank values. All Ranks in an Extent Pool are of the same RAID type.
# of FB Volumes Links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Total FB Capacity Sum of the capacity of all the fixed block volumes for this array
# of Allocated FB Links to the LUN Utilization Summary showing a list of allocated LUNs
FB Allocated Capacity
Sum of all the fixed block volume capacity that has been allocated
# of Unallocated FB The number of unallocated fixed block volumes
FB Unallocated Capacity
The fixed block capacity that is not in allocated
# of CKD Number of CKD volumes
CKD Capacity Sum of the capacity of all the CKD volumes for this array
Name Rank name links to the IBM Rank Summary
Usage Used Extents in the Rank
Total Extents Total Extents in the Rank
Available
Extents in this Rank that are available for allocation in the Extent Pools
If the available amount equals the total amount, it indicates that the rank is not allocated to any Extent Pools.
Name Extent Pool name links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary
Usage Amount of Extent capacity that is in use
Total Extents Total Extent capacity
Available Available Extent capacity
IBM Array Detail 297
IBM Storage System Capacity DetailMouse over the bars to view the capacity totals in GB.
IBM Storage System FB VolumesA pie chart represents fixed block volumes:• Ungrouped• Unmapped• Mapped
Mouse over the pie segments to view percentages.
Capacity and Object Usage ForecastGraphs represent forecasted usage for the following objects:• Array Sites• Arrays• Extent Pools• Ranks
298 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
IBM Rank SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Rank SummaryAn IBM Rank is logical storage, enabling storage provisioning that is not constrained by the size of an array. One or more arrays comprise an IBM Rank, forming logically contiguous storage. Note that IBM often refers to Arrays as RAID Arrays.
Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI
or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB.
• For FB open systems host, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating,
Configuration Error, Deconfiguration Error• RAID Types: 5, 6, 10• Storage Types: fb, ckd
Rank The name of the group of arrays
Storage System The physical storage system on which the rank resides
IBM Rank Summary 299
State
The Configuration State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating, Configuration Error, Deconfiguration ErrorA rank remains in an unassigned state until it is assigned to an Extent Pool.
Data State
• Normal - If no other data state issues, it is Normal. Note that an unassigned array will have a Normal data state.
• Degraded - A disk drive module in the array may be rebuilding.• Read Only - Possible issues: one or more disk drive modules
have failed; there aren’t enough spares available for rebuilding; data loss could occur if writes continue without redundancy.
• Failed - Possible causes: Two or more disk drive modules have failed; disk drive modules aren’t available for rebuilding data.
• Repairing - Array repair could be accepted, but not yet complete• Inaccessible - The storage image can’t access all the data on the
array.
Group The Rank Group is either 0 or 1, corresponding to the Extent Pool ID.
Raid Type RAID 5, 6, or 10
Storage Type Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD)
Total Capacity The rank’s total capacity; the capacity is derived from the number of extents
Used Capacity Amount of storage used by the rank
Available Capacity Amount of the rank’s storage that is available for use
Total Extents The total number of extents, striped across the disks in the array
Used Extents The number of partitions/extents that are in use.
Available Extents The number of extents available for use
ArrayThe arrays that comprise the Rank. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.
# of Array Sites 1 or more Array Sites comprise an Array, from which the Rank is configured
Extent Pool Name Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary
300 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
IBM Extent Pool SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Extent Pool Summary
Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI
or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB.
• For FB open systems host, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• Storage Types: fb, ckd• Rank Status: below, exceeded, full
Name Extent Pool name
Storage System The physical storage system (storage array) on which the extent pool resides
Rank Group A rank can only be assigned to one extent pool, but more than one rank can reside in an extent pool.
Storage Type Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD)For FB, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
Status
Rank Status: • below - % of available extents is less than threshold• exceeded - % of available extents is greater than threshold• full - 0 extents are available
Total Capacity Sum of the capacity of all extents in this pool
Available CapacityThe amount of space in this extent pool that is currently available; this value is derived from the total capacity minus the allocated capacity
Available Extents The number of extents that are available to the logical volume
IBM Extent Pool Summary 301
Reserved Extents The number of extents that are in reserved (this space must be explicitly released before the logical volume can use it)
# of Volumes The number of logical volumes that have been configured from this extent pool; this is the storage that can be given to a host
# of Ranks The number of ranks in this extent pool—1 or 2
302 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
IBM Disk SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Disk Summary
In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• Disk State: Normal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying,
Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred• Disk Usage: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member• Disk Classes: ENT, NL
ID Disk ID
Storage Array The physical storage array system
Array Site The array site ID links to the IBM Array Site Summary. If a disk is not in an array site, it is available for other use.
Disk Class Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)
Model The disk model identifier
Disk Usage How this disk is currently being used: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member
Disk Interface FCAL, SATA, SAS
Disk RPM The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000
Disk Rate The minimum disk interface rate for the disks in the array site
StateNormal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying, Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred
Capacity The disk’s capacity
IBM Disk Summary 303
304 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 19Chapter 16HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports
This chapter covers the following topics:• Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary• Hitachi Disk Summary• Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View)
305
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi DP Pool SummaryThe Dynamic Provisioning Pool uses virtual volumes for data storage, with actual capacity available upon request to a host writing to LUN storage. Use this report to ensure that your pool always has sufficient free capacity, enabling on-demand provisioning to hosts.
Pool ID The name of the DP Pool
Storage Array The storage array on which the volume pool resides
Capacity
Capacity of the PoolVirtual volumes can have a capacity that is greater than the pool capacity; however, it’s imperative that you monitor the pool capacity to ensure that space is available on demand.
Free CapacityMonitor this space to ensure that you do not deplete the available space in a pool, assuring that host requests for storage are not denied
Threshold1Threshold2
These thresholds monitor consumed capacity of the Dynamic Provisioning pool.
Number of DP Pool VOLs
The number of VOLs in this DP Pool; links to the LUN Utilization Summary to view the LDEVs that have been allocated to the DP Pool.
Number of DP VOLs The number of virtual volumes in this Dynamic Provisioning pool; links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Capacity of DP VOLs The capacity of the virtual volumes in the pool, including overhead for dynamic provisioning.
Status Normal, Blocked, Over Threshold
CLPR Cache logical partition for managing cache memory resources; as a best practice, often used to isolate storage allocations
306 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Hitachi Disk SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi Disk Summary
Device Name The name of the disk
Storage Array The storage array in which the disk is located; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report
Group Name The group to which the disk belongs; links to the Array Group Details report
Capacity Capacity of the disk
Vendor Vendor of the disk
Serial # Serial number of the disk
Model Disk model
Firmware Version The disk’s firmware version
RPM Disk revolutions per minute
Disk Type FC, SATA, BD, SAS, or Unknown
Chassis # The chassis number
Role unknown, data, unallocated, offline, outofservice, spare, spareunitialized, n/a
Hitachi Disk Summary 307
Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View)To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThe Array Capacity and Utilization report provides an overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized. The standard Array Capacity & Utilization report represents the HDS Dynamic Provisioning in the following manner:
308 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 20Chapter 16Virtualization Manager Reports
APTARE StorageConsole provides insight into Virtual Machine performance and the capacity utilization of mapped datastores. Virtualization Manager offers reports on storage resource utilization at the file system and virtual disk levels for each VM. In additional, forecasting reports predict future storage capacity needs in virtualized environments.The data collected on Virtual Machine storage is displayed in the reports described in this chapter. Using these reports, you can identify unused, reclaimable storage.This chapter covers the following topics:• Virtualization Terminology• Overview of Virtualization Manager• VM Server Summary• VM Server Detail• VM Summary• VM Detail• VM Files Summary• Performance Summary• Datastore Utilization• Datastore Detail• Datastore Usage Breakdown• Physical Disk Utilization• Physical Disk Detail• Logical Disk Utilization• VM Size Forecast• Datastore Capacity Forecast
309
Virtualization TerminologyThe following terms are defined in the context of APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager.Note: The usage of VM refers to a Virtual Machine, not Virtualization Manager.
Capacity: DatastoreThe capacity of all the datastores hosting a Virtual Machine File System (VMFS) or, for NAS storage, a Network File System (NFS).
Capacity: LogicalAlso known as the Virtual Disks or Volume, this is the capacity of the virtual machine, derived from the virtual machine’s VMDK file(s).
Datastore
The datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration files, Virtual Disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A datastore provides the vir-tual storage resources via mapping to physical storage on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The datastore is the storage provisioning source for one or more VMs on one or more hosts.
VM Server
The physical server (bare metal box) that is hosting the VMs via the virtualization software, such as ESX. Virtual machines reside on a VM Server, sometimes referred to as a Virtual Host or Vir-tual Machine Server.
Physical (Raw) Disk
A VM can use either a virtual disk or it can access the host machine’s physical disk drive—a Raw Device Mapping or Raw Disk Map (RDM) file. Raw disk mapping to a LUN may have been chosen in order to optimize performance.
Virtual Disks
Also known as a Virtual Hard Drive or Virtual Machine Images (.VMDK file), this is the storage that is available to a guest oper-ating system. It appears as a physical disk to the guest operating system, but it actually is a file that encapsulates the OS, applica-tions, and data files of the VM. The VMDK file is accessed as if it were a physical hard disk. VMDK files can be either on the host or stored remotely.
VM Guest Also known as a VM Instance—the logical server running on a VM Server.
Virtual Host See VM Server.
Virtual Machine (VM)
The container for the guest operating system and applications; each VM is separate from all other VMs, even though they may share physical resources, such as memory and storage devices.
VM Server
Virtual Machine Server—see VM Server or Virtual Host.StorageConsole uses VM Server throughout its reports to repre-sent the physical server that is hosting the Virtual Machines—for example, the physical server running ESX.
310 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
VMDK See Virtual Disks. Note that for Raw Mapping (RDM), the VMDK file simply contains the metadata to map to a LUN.
VMFS
The Virtual Machine File System, with a hierarchical directory, provides the structure for managing access to shared, clustered storage. Each VM has a single subdirectory in the VMFS volume for the VMDK files (virtual disks). For raw disk mapping, the VMFS is mounted on the Virtual Machine.
Volume
The Volume is the storage that is exposed to the OS (filesystems mounted it on it). A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS. These logical disks can be:• Virtual Disks, which are VMDK files that contain the actual
data that is part of a datastore. • Raw Mapping, which is a small VMDK file that contains the
metadata that maps to a LUN.Note: Volume Usage shown in StorageConsole reports represents logical disk usage.
Virtualization Terminology 311
Overview of Virtualization ManagerUsing APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager, you can optimize storage allocation to virtual systems to improve efficiency and reduce costs. Virtualization Manager complements your virtual management console, with reports that can help you determine if storage resources are over- or under-utilized and if applications running in the virtual environment are contributing to storage access bottlenecks. With Virtualization Manager, you can easily view the virtual-to-physical relationships to understand what virtual systems are consuming physical storage, and more importantly, how much of that storage is consumed by out-dated, unnecessary snapshot files.For additional details, see Virtualization Terminology.
Understanding the DatastoreSince APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager maps the VMs to the actual physical storage, it’s important to understand the Datastore. The Datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration files, VM disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A Datastore can be located on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The Datastore is the storage provisioning source for one or more VMs, on one or more hosts, mapping to one or more physical storage devices.
312 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
All of the objects managed by VMware vCenter comprise the VM inventory: hosts, clusters, VMs, and Networks.
Characteristics of a Datastore• Configured as a clustered file system• Configured per host, but multiple hosts can point to the same datastore• Managed at the host level and the data center level—one datastore object per data center• Datastore path format:
[<datastore>] <path>
where <datastore> is the datastore name and <path> is a slash-delimited path from the root of the datastore. Example: [storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and MonitoringUsing Virtualization Manager, you have the tools to effectively plan the deployment of virtual machines in your enterprise and then follow through with monitoring storage allocation and usage. In concert with Capacity Manager and Backup Manager, you have the ability to monitor all aspects of your storage environment and you can ensure that your data is sufficiently protected.Virtualization Manager offers the following solutions:
Virtual Environment Administration Reports for Planning & Monitoring• Determine optimal deployment of
Virtual Machines• VM Size Forecast
• Identify storage access bottlenecks • VM Server Summary• Performance Summary
• Reclaim space• Identify VM files that are taking up
storage, but are not in the VM Inventory
• VM Summary - Choose a Datastore and drill down to the details to determine file system allocations.
• VM Files Summary
Overview of Virtualization Manager 313
VM Server SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Server SummaryUse this report to view the list of Virtual Machine Servers, with drilldown access to reports that provide details to help you determine what’s using the space on a datastore.View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
The VM Server Summary lists the VM Servers within your selected scope—that is, the physical servers that are hosting the VMs.When running this report, the following mutually exclusive scope selections are available:• Server Group• DatastoreNote: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights (for example, Status or Hardware Health) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.
Name Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example, the ESX host
IP Address IP address of the VM Server
State VM connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None
Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem
Hardware Health Indicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert
# CPUs Total number of processors in the virtual machine
Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs
The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Total Memory Total memory capacity of the VM Server.
Avg Mem Usage Last 24 Hrs
The VM Server’s average memory usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
314 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
# Disks
The number of disks that the VM Server can access—either internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Note that the disks are specific to the VM server, whereas the Datastore utilization may be using both VM Server disks and disks apart from the VM Server disks.
UnallocatedAmount of disk space that is unallocated. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, unallocated, and percentage unallocated. Click on this thermometer to view the Physical Disk Utilization.
# Datastores The number of datastores provisioned to the VM Server; drill down to the Datastore Utilization report
Datastore UsageMouse over the thermometer bar to view the total datastore capacity, the amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Datastore Capacity Forecast.
# Active VMsA VM is active when it is powered on. An inactive VM is in the inventory, but is powered off. This column shows the number of active VMs. Drill down to the VM Summary.
# Total VMs The total number of VMs in the inventory, both active and inactive. Drill down to the VM Summary.
VM Server Summary 315
VM Server DetailThis report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Server Summary report.Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.
VM and VM Disk Size ExampleIn the VM Server Detail shown above, the VM size is greater than the VM Disk size.• VM Size = the sum of all files for this VM (including snapshot files), indicating the amount
of storage that the VM is actually using• VM Disk Size = the amount of space that was presented to the Guest OS when the VM was
created and configured
Given these definitions, your task would be to determine what is taking up all the storage for this VM. Often, a number of stale, unneeded snapshot files can be removed to free up space.• Click on the VM Name to view the VM Detail with the list of snapshots and VM Files.• View the VM Files list, where the file path identifies the directory where the data is stored.• From a Datastore perspective, view the Datastore Utilization and drill down to the Datastore
Detail to identify the physical disks associated with a VM’s storage utilization.
316 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Summary Data
Name Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example, the ESX host
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
State Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None
Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem
Hardware Health Indicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert
System Vendor Host vendor
System Model Model of the host system
VM Server Detail 317
Performance & Forecast
Largest VMsClick the link to access the full list of the largest VMs, listed in descending order, with the top storage-consuming VMs at the top of the list.Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.
Total Memory Total memory available as a resource to the VMs on this host
Total CPU Total CPU available as a resource to the VMs on this host
CPU Vendor Processor’s vendor
CPU Description Type of processor
CPU Speed Processor speed
# HBAs/Ports Number of host bus adapters and ports on the VM Server
# NICs & NIC Speed Number of physical network interface cards and their speeds
# Total VMs Number of VMs configured on this host and in the inventory
# Active VMs A VM is active when it is in the inventory and powered on; it is inactive if it is in the inventory, but powered off.
# Datastores Number of datastores that this VM Server is using
Datastore Usage Amount of storage in the datastore that this VM Server is using
# Disks The number of disks that the VM Server can access—either internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.
UnallocatedMouse over the thermometer bar to view the total disk capacity, the amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.
Version Version of the virtual server software, such as ESX
Last Updated Timestamp of last data collection
CPU Average and Maximum usage graphed over time—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Memory Average and Maximum usage graphed over time—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Name Name of the VM
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
State None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended
318 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Datastores
Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem
CPU Usage The VM’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Memory Usage The VM’s average memory usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Volume UsageA Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS; usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe. For inactive VMs, the usage is unknown.
Datastore Capacity
The used and total capacity of all the datastores on which a VM resides in a Virtual Machine File System (VMFS) or, for NAS storage, a Network File System (NFS) file.
Name Name of the Datastore; links to the Datastore Detail.
Total Capacity The total capacity of the Datastore
Used Amount of Datastore space in use
Free Free space in bytes for the Datastore; value periodically updated by the server
Usage % of used Datastore capacity
Total VM Used Total storage used by all VM files; links to the VM Files Summary.
VMDK Used
The sum of all virtual disks—VMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created.
VM Disk Capacity
This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disks were originally created for the VMs.
# Sharing VM Servers
The VM Servers that have mounted this Datastore; links to the VM Server Summary
# VMs The number of VMs using this Datastore; links to the VM Summary.
# Extents The number of extents that were added to expand the Datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents).
# Disks The number of disks that the VM Server can access—either internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.
# ArraysThe number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage links to Array Capacity and Utilization. This provides the “map” from the Datastore to the arrays that supply storage to the Datastore.
VM Server Detail 319
DisksThese are the physical disks that are available to the VM Server.
Name
Name of the storage device in the following 4-part format:<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>
EXAMPLE: vmhba1:1:3:1• If vmha appears in the name, it indicates a specific physical HBA
on the ESX server.• If the fourth segment is not included in the name, it indicates that
the datastore has consumed the whole disk/LUN.
Disk Type Disk type: DAS SCSI, Fibre Channel SAN, iSCSI, or NAS
Vendor The disk’s vendor
Array The name of the storage array in which the disk resides
LUN The name of the LUN; if it is a local disk, the LUN is null
Operational State Operational state of the LUN, such as “ok” and “degraded”
Total Capacity Total capacity of the host disk
Allocated Capacity Amount of the disk storage that has been allocated
# Datastores Indicates the number of datastores using the disk
# Extents The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore
320 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
VM SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM SummaryUse this report to find the largest Virtual Machines.Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.
View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
Note: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights (for example, Connection, Power, or Status) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.
VM Name Name of the Virtual Machine
VM Server The server that is hosting the VM
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
VM Summary 321
State (Connection, Power)
None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended
Status
This is essentially an alarm indicator that reflects the condition of the resources:Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem
Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hours
The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Avg Memory Usage Last 24 Hrs
The host’s average Memory usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Size: VMSize of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM.See VM and VM Disk Size Example.
Size: VM DiskThis is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.See VM and VM Disk Size Example.
Volume Usage
This is the disk usage inside of the VM (for example, C:\, D:\)A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS; usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe. For inactive VMs, the usage is unknown.
Datastore Usage Datastores used by this VM
322 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
VM DetailThis report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Summary report.
VM Detail 323
Summary Data
Performance & ForecastNote: The default StorageConsole polling interval is set to every 5 hours, however, this can be customized.
VM Size Over TimeDisplays the average and maximum VM storage usage to date.
Name Name of the virtual machine
VM Server Links to the VM Server Detail report
State None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended
Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem
VM Path Name The file path in datastore format; for example:[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
System OS Guest operating system running on the VM
Current Snapshot
Path and name of the current snapshot
Notes The VM’s annotation field
VMware Tools Indicates if the VMware tools have been installed for the guest operating system
Tools Version Version of the VMware tools that are running in the guest operating system
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
VM Size Amount of storage the VM takes up
Boot Time The VM’s power-on time
Suspend Time The time when the VM was put in a suspended state
Datastore The datastore to which the VM belongs; links to the Datastore Detail report
Resource Pool The resource pool (compartment) to which the VM belongs
Last Update Date
The last time the VM’s configuration was updated
CPU The CPU average and maximum usage to date.
Memory The Memory average and maximum usage to date.
324 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
VolumesThis table lists the local disks seen by the virtual machine, such as C:\, D:\.
DisksThis table provides the details for the “physical” disks in the VM.
SnapshotsA tree structure represents the Snapshots for this VM.Example:
Disk Path The path to the VM’s local disk
Total Capacity Total capacity of the local, logical disk
Used Amount of volume used
Free Amount of the volume that is unused and potentially available
Usage Mouse over the thermometer to display the usage %
Disk Label The label of the physical disk
Disk Type RDISK = raw, physical disk; Capacity will be N/A for RDISKsVDISK = virtual disk
Capacity The storage potential of the virtual disk
Datastore The datastore to which the virtual disk belongs
LUN The LUN on which the virtual disk’s storage is located
Mode
• 1 = Persistent - immediate, permanent changes• 2 = Non-persistent - changes do not persist once VM is powered off• 3 = Undoable - user determines how and when changes are saved• 4 = Append - changes appended to a log when VM is powered off
VM Detail 325
VM Files
File Name VM file name
File Path The file path in datastore format; for example:[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
Datastore Links to the Datastore Detail report
VM Server Links to the VM Server Detail report
File Type
File type identifier, such as:
VmLog - log for VMware workstation activity (.log)VmNvram - VM BIOS state (.nvrm)VmDisk - contents of the VM’s hard drive (.vmdk)VmSnapshot - metadata about snapshots (.vmsd)VmConfigFile - primary configuration file (.vmx)
File Size Size of the file
Last Modified Date of last file modification
326 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
VM Files SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Files SummaryThis report lists all VM files. Use this report to identify space that could be reclaimed. View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
File Name Name of the file
File Path The file path in datastore format; for example:[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
Datastore The datastore in which this file resides
VM Server The host that is running the VM software (ESX)
VM Name Name of the virtual machine
Host Name The server that is hosting the VMs
VM Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem
VM Files Summary 327
File Type
File type identifier, such as:
VmLog - log for VMware workstation activity (.log)VmNvram - VM BIOS state (.nvrm)VmDisk - contents of the VM’s hard drive (.vmdk)VmSnapshot - metadata about snapshots (.vmsd)VmConfigFile - primary configuration file (.vmx)
File Size Size of the file
Last Modified Date and time stamp of last file modification
328 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Performance SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > Performance SummaryView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.In the Report Designer, several Advanced options enable filtering of the output:• Report Options: CPU and/or Memory• Report By: Each VM/Host, Consolidated
Performance Summary 329
Datastore UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore UtilizationView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.The Datastore Utilization Summary gives you the ability to identify what storage is in use and where it is located. Click on the Datastore link to view the Datastore Detail where you can view the Extents and then link to the corresponding Physical Disk Detail. In addition, the Datastore Detail provides a link to the array from which the storage has been provisioned.
Name The name of the Datastore links to Datastore Detail.
Total Capacity Total capacity of the datastore
Free Amount of the datastore that currently is unused and potentially available
330 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Used Total amount of the datastore that is in use—both VM usage and other files
Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the % of the total capacity used.
VMDK Used
The sum of all virtual disks—VMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created.
Total VM Used
Size of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM.This value links to the VM Files Summary, which lists the usage details.
VM Disk Capacity
This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.
# Shared Hosts
The number of hosts configured to access this datastore.
# VMs Number of virtual machines stored on this datastore
# Extents The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents).
# Disks The number of disks used by this datastore (up to 32 physical disks)
# Arrays The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage; links to Array Capacity and Utilization.
Datastore Utilization 331
Datastore DetailThis report can be accessed from the Datastore Utilization report.
Name Name of the datastore
Type Datastore type: a specific NFS file system or NAS
Server This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS.
Folder The VM folder in which this Datastore is located. This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS.
Multiple Host Access
Indicates if this datastore can be shared by multiple hosts: Yes or No
Last Updated Timestamp of the last write access
# VMs This number links to the VM Summary report, listing the VMs associated with this Datastore.
# Extents The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents).
# Disks The number of physical disks associated with the datastore
# Arrays The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage links to Array Capacity and Utilization.
VMDK Used
The sum of all virtual disks—VMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created.
Total VM Used Amount of the Datastore used by VMs
Total Capacity Total capacity of this Datastore
Free Capacity Available capacity in this Datastore
Used Capacity Amount of this Datastore’s capacity already in use
332 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Datastore Capacity & Forecast
Extents
Capacity Usage Mouse over this thermometer to view the usage percentage
Total VM Disk Capacity
This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. When you connect to a VM client, this capacity appears as hard disks.
Name
Name of the storage device in the following 4-part format:<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>
EXAMPLE: vmhba1:1:3:1• If vmhba appears in the name, it indicates a specific physical HBA on
the ESX server.• If the fourth segment is not included in the name, it indicates that the
datastore has consumed the whole disk/LUN.
Type VMFS or NFS
Mode physical, logical
Capacity Capacity of this particular extent
Disk The disk on which the extent resides
Array If there is a LUN mapping, a link to the corresponding array accesses the Array Capacity and Utilization report.
Datastore Detail 333
Shared VM Servers
VM Utilization
Name Name of the VM Server
IP Address IP address of the VM Server
State Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None
Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem
Hardware Health
Indicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert
# CPUs Number of CPUs on the VM Server
Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs
The VM server’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Total Memory Total memory available on the VM server
Avg Mem Usage Last 24 Hrs
The VM Server’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
# Datastores Number of Datastores associated with this VM server; links to the Datastore Utilization report.
Datastores Usage
Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, used, and percentage used. Click on the thermometer to view the Datastore Capacity Forecast.
# Disks The number of disks that the VM Server can access—either internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.
UnallocatedAmount of disk space that is unallocated. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, unallocated, and percentage unallocated. Click on this thermometer to view the Physical Disk Utilization.
# Active VMsA VM is active when it is powered on. An inactive VM is in the inventory, but is powered off. Click on this link to view the VM Summary.
# Total VMs Number of VMs hosted by this VM server. Click on this link to view the VM Summary.
VM Name Name of the VM (as displayed in VMware vCenter)
VM Server The server that is hosting the VM
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
State (Connection)
Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None
334 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
State (Power) On, Off
Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem
Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs
The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Avg Mem Usage Last 24 Hrs
The host’s average Memory usage for the past 24 hours—for the number of samples taken within that timeframe
Size (VM) The size of this VM (includes VMDK files, snapshots, and log files), taking up Datastore space
Size (VM Disk) This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.
Storage (Volume Usage)
This is the aggregation of the logical disk usage. A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS. The VM Disks are partitioned into volumes, which are exposed to the OS. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total amount, the amount used, and the percentage of the volume used by this VM.
Datastores The list of Datastores that this VM is using.
Datastore Detail 335
Datastore Usage BreakdownUse this report to view a graphical representation of the file types comprising each datastore. See the Overview of Virtualization Manager for a diagram and description of the types of files that are maintained in a Datastore.
336 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Physical Disk UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk UtilizationView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
NameThe raw device mapping path, in the format:vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>
VM Server Name of the VM Server
Disk Type SCSI device type, such as disk
Vendor Device manufacturer
Array The array on which the disk resides; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report
LUN
The LUN path, in the format:<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>
Links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Operational State The device’s state of health
Physical Disk Utilization 337
Total Capacity Total capacity of the disk
Allocated Capacity The amount of the disk that has been allocated
# Datastores The number of datastores that are using the disk
# Extents The number of extents associated with the disk
338 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Physical Disk DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk UtilizationThen, click on a Name link.
NameThe raw device mapping path, in the format:vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>
VM Server Name of the VM Server
Operational State Operational state of the disk, such as “ok” and “degraded”
Model Model of the disk
Vendor Device manufacturer
SCSI Level The device’s SCSI level, an indicator of clock and bus speeds
Last Updated Last date and time of data collection
Disk Type SCSI device type, such as disk
Total Capacity Capacity of this disk
LUN
The LUN path, in the format:<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>
Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
Physical Disk Detail 339
Array Name of the array in which the disk is located; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report
# FC Targets Number of Fibre Channel targets—paths to the array from the host
# iSCSI Targets The number of paths to the iSCSI array from the host
iSCSI Target Name The actual target name from the array’s perspective
iSCSI Node Name The actual node name from the array’s perspective
Array Node WWN Storage array node World Wide Name
Array Port WWN Storage array port’s World Wide Name
HBA Node WWN Host bus adapter node World Wide Name
HBA Port WWN Host bus adapter port World Wide Name
Extents
Name: Name of the extentType: Type of partition, such as vmfs, linuxSwap, vmkDiagnosticCapacity: Total capacity of the extentDatastore: The datastore to which the extent belongs; links to the Datastore Detail
340 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Logical Disk UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM SummaryThen, click on the Volume Usage thermometer.
Disk Path The path to the logical disk
VM Name Virtual machine name
Total Capacity Total amount of storage allocated to the VM
Used Amount of the VM’s allocated storage that is in use
Free Amount of the VM’s allocated storage that is available for use
Usage A thermometer represents the percentage of disk usage
Logical Disk Utilization 341
VM Size ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > VM Size ForecastThis VM report projects the growth of the VM over time, based on historical data.View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
The VM name links to the VM Server Detail.
342 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Datastore Capacity ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > Datastore Capacity ForecastView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
The Datastore name links to the Datastore Detail.
Datastore Capacity Forecast 343
344 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 21Chapter 16Replication Manager Reports
APTARE StorageConsole reports on SnapMirror data replication details, enabling you to easily identify successful replication, but more importantly, any data protection vulnerability.This chapter covers the following topics:• Overview of Replication Manager• SnapMirror Summary• SnapMirror Details• SnapMirror Schedule• SnapMirror Status Summary• SnapMirror Data Transfer• SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk• SnapMirror Relationship Summary• Data Protection Dashboard• FlexClone Summary• Aggregate Mirror Summary• SnapVault Secondary Configuration• SnapVault Summary• SnapVault Detail• SnapVault Status
345
Overview of Replication ManagerThe APTARE StorageConsole Replication Manager offers a view of your NetApp Data ONTAP SnapMirror, SnapVault, and FlexClone environments. These reports enable quick access to the data replication details to ensure that your business-critical data is protected and has been successfully replicated on schedule.SnapMirror can replicate data in the following manner:• Volume to QTree• Volume to Volume• QTree to Volume• QTree to QTree
SnapVault can replicate data in the following manner:• Volume to QTree• QTree to QTree
346 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapMirror SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror SummaryThe SnapMirror Summary provides a listing of the status of SnapMirror transactions. It lists the source-destination pairs, along with the most frequently used relevant metrics.
SnapMirror Summary 347
Source Location
The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Links to the NetApp Volume Details.
Destination Location
The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Links to the NetApp Volume Details.
Mirror TimestampDate and time of last SnapMirror transaction, including unsuccessful mirrors.Links to SnapMirror Details.
Contents The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original
Last Transfer Size Size of the last SnapMirror transfer
Last Transfer Duration (Secs)
Duration in seconds of the last SnapMirror transfer
Transfer KB/Secs Rate of data transfer
Base Snapshot The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination
State The state of the SnapMirror pair: un-initialized, snapmirrored, broken-off, quiesced, source, or unknown
StatusTransfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused.
Summary Status Mouse over the Failed status to reveal the actual error message
Lag Time The length of time since the last SnapMirror transfer
348 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapMirror DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror SummaryThen, click on a Mirror Timestamp link.The SnapMirror Summary provides the details of a SnapMirror transaction.
Source Storage Array The name of the Source storage array links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.
Destination Storage Array
The name of the Destination storage array links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.
Source Volume The source volume name links to the NetApp Volume Detail.
Destination Volume The destination volume name links to the NetApp Volume Detail.
Source QTree The source QTree name links to the NetApp QTree Summary.
Destination QTree The destination QTree name links to the NetApp QTree Summary.
Contents The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original
Mirror Timestamp Date and time of last SnapMirror transaction, including unsuccessful mirrors
State The state of the SnapMirror pair: un-initialized, snapmirrored, broken-off, quiesced, source, or unknown
SnapMirror Details 349
StatusTransfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused.
Transfer Progress Indicates if a current transfer is in progress
Current Transfer Type
The current SnapMirror transfer type: initialize, store, schedule, retry, retrieve, resync, or migrate. A value is displayed only if there is a transfer in progress.
Last Transfer Duration (Seconds)
Length of time for the last mirror data transfer
Last Transfer From
The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Last Transfer Size Amount of data in the last mirror data transfer
350 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapMirror ScheduleTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Schedule
Note that the SnapMirror schedule is initiated by the Destination system.
Source Location
The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Links to the NetApp Volume Details.
Destination Location
The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Links to the NetApp Volume Details.
Day of the Month
The notation is similar to crontab format:
- means match nothing1 means match day 11,3 means match days 1 and 31-3 means match days 1, 2, 31-30/7 means match every 7th day until the 30th day* means match all possible values
Hours
The notation is similar to crontab format:
- means match nothing1 means match hour 11,3 means match hours 1 and 31-3 means match hours 1, 2, 31-24/4 means match every 4th hour until the end of the day* means match all possible values
SnapMirror Schedule 351
SnapMirror Status SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror StatusNote: SnapMirror Status is based on the last sampling of data. NetApp keeps track of the latest SnapMirror schedule, however, the data shown in this report reflects the history of what was captured from the NetApp SnapMirror data. In some cases, a SnapMirror transaction may have occurred between data collection cycles.
This bar chart provides an at-a-glance view of the success or failure for each selected timeframe, such as days, weeks, or months. Mouse over the colored section of each bar to view the numeric details. Click on a colored section of a bar to drill down to the SnapMirror Summary.
Minutes
The notation is similar to crontab format:
- means match nothing1 means match minute 11,3 means match minutes 1 and 31-3 means match minutes 1, 2, 30-55/5 means match every 5th minute until the 55th minute* means match all possible values
Max Transfer Rate The maximum transfer rate in KB/sec. Typically, this is the fastest possible rate of the storage system.
Error Error message displayed only if there is a transfer error
Last Successful Date/timestamp of the last successful SnapMirror transferLinks to SnapMirror Details.
352 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapMirror Data TransferTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Data TransferThis bar chart provides an at-a-glance view of the amount of SnapMirror data transferred from NetApp source storage systems to destination storage systems. Click on a bar to drill down to the SnapMirror Summary for the corresponding time period.
SnapMirror Data Transfer 353
SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk
Use this report to pro-actively track the storage being consumed by SnapMirror transactions. Identify SnapMirror Volume and QTree usage that is expected to exceed capacity.To configure this report to alert you when Volumes and/or QTrees are at risk, generate the report and save an instance. Then, configure an alert to email you when this report is populated with volumes or QTrees at risk.
Source Capacity Capacity of the SnapMirror source
Source Capacity Used Amount of the source that is in use
Risk Date The point at which SnapMirror storage will be limited
Destination Capacity Capacity of the SnapMirror destination
Destination Capacity Used
Amount of the destination that is in use
Space Guarantee on Destination
Indicates if the destination volume has a space guarantee enabled
Source Location
The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Destination Location
The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Base Snapshot The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination
354 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapMirror Relationship SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Relationship Summary
Source Location
The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Destination Location
The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Mirror Timestamp Date and time of last SnapMirror transaction, including unsuccessful mirrors
Contents The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original
Last Transfer Size (KB)
Amount of data in the last mirror transfer
Last Transfer Duration (Secs)
Length of time for the last mirror data transfer
SnapMirror Relationship Summary 355
Transfer KB/Secs Rate of mirror data transfer
Base Snapshot The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination
State uninitialized, snapmirrored, broken-off, quiesced, source, unknown
StatusTransfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused.
Summary Status Success, Failed - Mouse over the Failed status to view the error message that contains the details of why the transfer failed
Lag Time The length of time since the last SnapMirror transfer
356 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Data Protection DashboardTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > Data Protection DashboardThis report provides an at-a-glance view of the status of your SnapMirror data transfers, with drilldowns to details so that you can quickly resolve issues.Click on a colored circle to drill down to the SnapMirror Summary.
Data Protection Dashboard 357
FlexClone SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > FlexClone Reports > FlexClone Summary
Parent Volume The parent NetApp volume links to the NetApp Volume Details.
Child Volume The child volume of the FlexClone transaction links to its NetApp Volume Details.
Parent Base Snapshot The name of the initial, base snapshot
Clone Creation Date The date and timestamp when the clone was created
Clone Split Date The date and timestamp when the clone was split
Split Estimate The amount of storage estimated to be consumed by the split
Aggr Available The amount of storage on the aggregate that is not in use
358 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Aggregate Mirror SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > Aggregate Mirror Reports > Aggregate Mirror Summary
Aggregate Name The NetApp Aggregate that was mirrored; links to the NetApp Aggregate Detail.
Mirror StatusThe Aggregate Mirror status: invalid, uninitialized, needs CP count check, CP count check in progress, unmirrored, mirrored, mirror degraded, mirror resynchronizing, failed, or limbo
Mirror Creation Date Date and timestamp of the mirror creation
Aggregate Mirror Summary 359
SnapVault Secondary ConfigurationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Sec Configuration
Primary SystemThe primary system of the SnapVault relationship and also the baseline transferLinks to the NetApp Storage System Detail.
Primary Path This path is used for the source of the baseline transfer
Secondary Path This path is the destination of the baseline transfer and as such, is created during the baseline transfer
Max Transfer Rate Maximum transfer rate; KB treated as 1024 bytes
Tries Count
Indicates the maximum number of times this transfer will be attempted, as set in the SnapVault configuration. If a transfer isn’t successful after this number of tries, the secondary will not try again and all the data that was transferred on previous attempts will be removed.
Last Successful Date Timestamp of the last successful transfer
Last Transfer Size Amount of data in the last SnapVault transfer
Lag Time The amount of time from the start of the most recent successful transfer
Last Base SnapShot Name
The name of the last SnapShot for this primary system
360 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapVault SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Summary
Destination Location
The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats:NetApp Storage System: Volume Name
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name
Mirror Timestamp Date and time of last SnapVault transactionLinks to the SnapVault Detail.
Contents The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original
Last Transfer Size Amount of data in the last SnapVault transfer
Last Transfer Duration (Secs)
Length of time for the last SnapVault data transfer
Transfer KB/Sec Rate of SnapVault data transfer
Base Snapshot The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination
State uninitialized, snapvaulted, broken-off, quiesced, source, restoring, unknown
Status aborting, idle, pending, quiescing, restoring, resyncing, transferring
Summary Status Success, Failed - Mouse over the Failed status to view the error message that contains the details of why the transfer failed
Lag TimeThe length of time since the beginning of the last successful transfer from the source. This field is populated only for successful baseline transfers.
SnapVault Summary 361
SnapVault Detail
Source System Hostname of the source system
Source Volume Volume of the source system
Source QTree QTree of the source system
Contents The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original
State The state of the source-destination relationship: unitialized, snapvaulted, broken-off, unknown, source, restoring, quiesced
Transfer Progress Indicates the amount of data transferred so far, available only for active transfers
Destination System Hostname of the destination system
Destination Volume Volume of the destination system
Destination QTree QTree of the destination system
Mirror Timestamp Date and time of last SnapVault transaction
362 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Schedule Report (Primary and Secondary)
StatusTransfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused.
Current Transfer Type
This field is populated only for active transfers.initialize, update, retry, or resync
Last Transfer Duration (Secs)
Duration of the last transfer
Last Transfer Size Amount of data transferred in the last SnapVault transaction—in kilobytes (1024 bytes)
Last Transfer From The name of the last transfer’s source system
Last Transfer Type initialize, update, retry, or resync
Schedule Name ID of the SnapVault schedule
Storage Array The name of the storage array
Volume Name The volume related to this schedule
Day of Week A comma-separated list or a range of days (3-letter abbreviation) for this schedule
Hour of Day A comma-separated list or a range of hours for this schedule, where 0 represents midnight
Retention Count The maximum number of snapshots that will be kept for this schedule
StatusTransfer completion status for the scheduled SnapVault: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused.
Is Auto UpdateSecondary Schedule onlyY or N— if auto-update is configured, schedules will update transfers before a new snapshot is created
SnapVault Detail 363
SnapVault ScheduleTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Schedule
Schedule Name Unique identifier of a SnapVault schedule; this name serves as a prefix in the name of snapshots created by this schedule
Storage Array Link to the Storage System Details.
Volume Name The volume related to this schedule
Day of Week A comma-separated list or a range of days (3-letter abbreviation) for this schedule
Hour of Day A comma-separated list or a range of hours for this schedule, where 0 represents midnight
Retention Count The maximum number of snapshots that will be kept for this schedule
StatusTransfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused.
Is Auto UpdateRelevant only if you selected Secondary in the Report Designer;Y or N— if auto-update is configured, schedules will update transfers before a new snapshot is created
364 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
SnapVault StatusTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Status SummaryClick on a colored section of a bar to drill down to the SnapVault Summary.
SnapVault Status 365
SnapVault Data TransferTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Data TransferMouse over a bar to view the amount of data transferred.Click on a bar to view the SnapVault Summary.
366 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Index
Aapplications
at risk, 235over-provisioned, 236storage dashboard, 237
arraycapacity, 214, 260capacity forecasting, 232group details, 229port utilization, 230
Bbackup
duration report, 110bar chart
example, 81billing
chargeback report, 248usage policy, 186
Ccapacity
at risk, 252planning, 175
capacity reportsarray capacity, 214, 260array forecast, 232array group, 229array port, 230chargeback, 248host detail, 221host forecast, 233host utilization, 219hosts at risk, 256LUN utilization, 225LUNs at risk, 252over-provisioned
hosts, 258over-provisioning, 254
changingpassword, 7reports, 30
chargeback, 248client
consecutive errors, 114NetWorker instance, 201protection summary, 135
columns, 29command center, 124
content pane, 2
Ddashboard
command center, 124creating, 50data protection, 126media forecasting, 176operations, 122storage pools, 138
data protection, 126deleting reports, 32designing reports, 10disk
usage & performance, 159drive
performance, 165, 167utilization, 165
durationbackup/restore, 110
Eemailing reports, 38error
consecutive, 114error log
summary, 112export reports, 34
Ffailed jobs, 46forecasting, 175
array capacity, 232host capacity, 233media, 176media availability, 179media consumption, 180scratch pool, 183tape drive usage, 182
Hhome page, 54host
at risk, 256capacity forecasting, 233over-provisioned, 258utilization detail, 221utilization summary, 219
Jjob
detail, 105duration, 110notes, 108queue, 119running, 119status summary, 101summary by server, 118summary report, 103volume summary, 109
Llog
error, 112login/logout, 5LUN
at risk, 252over-provisioned, 254utilization, 225
Mmedia
availabilityforecasting, 179
consumption forecast, 180current summary, 144forecasting
dashboard, 176tape detail, 146tape summary, 145usage details, 181
menus, 3message of the day, 127mission control, 132monthly summary, 117
Nnavigation
report, 1NetApp reports, 260note
adding to job, 105notes, 108
Ooperations dashboard, 122over-provisioning, 254
hosts, 258
Index 367
LUN, 254
Ppassword, 7policy
backup details, 194billing & chargeback, 186NetBackup, 193NetWorker, 198TSM domain details, 197TSM domains, 196
profile, user, 6protection
client, 135
Qqueue
job summary, 119
Rreal time status, 173refresh reports, 29report template designer
formatting, 78SQL Query, 64
reportschanging, 30custom, 55deleting, 32designing, 10emailing, 38exporting reports, 34finding, 1forecast, 175generating, 26instances, 14job summary, 103parameters, 20refresh, 29saving, 31scheduling, 34scope, 15, 16searching, 32sharing, 46templates, 14viewing, 42
restoreduration report, 110files/folders, 205
restoringfiles/folders, 205
Ssaving reports, 31scheduling reports, 34scope, 15, 16scratch pool, 183search
report, 1, 32servers, 18
serverconsumption
summary, 191details, 128groups, 131search, 18
service levelbackup start time, 151
sharing reports, 46SLA
backup duration, 155backup start time, 151backup status, 153
sorting, 29SQL query, 64storage pools, 138storage unit
summary, 172
Ttape drive
forecasting usage, 182scratch pool, 183usage, 182
time zone, 104TSM
database utilization, 171storage pools, 138
Uutilization
chargeback, 248largest volume, 116TSM database, 171
Vvolume
largest, 116summary, 109utilization, 116
368 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide